JP7355425B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 may execute a specific performance that suggests that an advantageous gaming state may occur, and in the specific performance, a plurality of unit performances are continuously executed.

JP 2019-181255 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing a specific performance in which a plurality of unit performances are consecutively executed in order to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A game execution means that may create an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
and a performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
A specific performance may be executed that suggests that there is a possibility of the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state,
In the specific performance, multiple types of unit performances can be performed N times in succession, and the case where the same type of unit performance is performed N times is better than the case where the unit performance of the same type is performed N-1 times. There is a high possibility that you will be in an advantageous gaming situation,
The unit performance includes a first unit performance and a second unit performance,
Compared to the case where both the first unit performance and the second unit performance are executed together in the specific performance, only one of the first unit performance or the second unit performance is executed alone in the specific performance. If the game is executed in
The performance mode of the first unit performance includes a first low expectation mode, and a first medium expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the first low expectation mode. a first high expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the first medium expectation mode;
The presentation mode of the second unit performance includes a second low expectation mode, and a second medium expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the second low expectation mode. a second high expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the second medium expectation mode;
If the unit performance of the same type is performed two or more times in one specific performance, it will not be performed in the same performance mode, but in the specific performance, the second or more production mode in a certain order. is characterized in that it is executed in such a way that the expectation of the advantageous gaming state is higher than in the previous order .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a configuration example of a reach determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. This is a configuration example of a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 1st look-ahead determination table. It is an example of a structure of a 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold performance. It is a figure showing an example of a suspension change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a suspension change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table in the non-time saving state concerning a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating execution timings of various director performances and execution timings of a precursor performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an omen performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of the first specific performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of the 2nd specific production. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific performance (L). It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of the 3rd specific presentation (SP). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (L). It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (SP). It is a figure showing the example of composition of a specific performance judgment table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first precursor execution timing determination table when the director performance is executed twice in the special figure fluctuation performance, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first sign execution timing determination table when the director performance is executed twice in the special figure fluctuation performance. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a first precursor execution timing determination table in the case where the first sign execution timing determination table is executed twice; It is a figure showing the example of composition of an omen effect judgment table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a second precursor execution timing determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative image in a normal mode, a hold display area, and an outline of the display area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a decorative image, a hold display area, and the display area in a normal mode in detail. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative image, a hold display area, and an outline of the display area in the first movement mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the decoration image, the hold display area, and the display area in the first movement mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a field in detail. (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative image, a hold display area, and an outline of the display area in the second movement mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the decoration image, the hold display area, and the display area in the second movement mode. It is an explanatory diagram showing a field in detail. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a reservation position movement advance notice judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a suspension change notice judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a suspension change notice judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a suspension change notice judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a suspension change timing judgment table. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice. This is a production flow related to special mode production. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a special mode performance execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a chance-up scenario determination table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a chance up type pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a chance up type pattern judgment table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a comprehensive performance mode judgment table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of special mode performance. It is a top view of an upper plate. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the production control board side in a fourth embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a specific example of a custom operation during non-gaming. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a specific example of a custom operation during non-gaming. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a specific example of a custom operation during non-gaming. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a specific example of a custom operation during non-gaming. It is an explanatory view explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game. It is an explanatory view explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game. It is an explanatory view explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game. It is an explanatory view explaining a specific example of a custom operation during a game. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 5th embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second big prize opening 15. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the game control board side according to the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the production control board side according to a fifth embodiment. (A) is a configuration example of the jackpot determination table according to the fifth embodiment, (B) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment, and (C) is a configuration example of the jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment. This is a configuration example of a small winning symbol type determination table. It is a configuration example of a jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment. It is a configuration example of a small winning game control table according to a fifth embodiment. It is a time chart showing the flow of a small winning game. It represents the relationship between the type of special symbol that triggers the occurrence of a jackpot game (special symbol type), the gaming state that changes with the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type, and the ending conditions related to the gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a game state setting table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table concerning a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of time production.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko game machine PY refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko game machine PY. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY from the player facing the pachinko machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to cause the game ball to fire. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 41k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left-right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Furthermore, a second effect button 42k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 42k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the big prize opening 14, a predetermined number (in the basic embodiment, one game ball) is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) related to games that can obtain gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off. Further, the power supply board 190 is provided with a RAM clear switch 192 that can be pressed down. The RAM clear switch 192 is used to cause the gaming CPU 102 to clear (hereinafter referred to as "RAM clear") gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 of the gaming control microcomputer 101 (described later) when the power is turned on. . The RAM clear switch 192 is provided on a power supply board 190 placed on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY. Therefore, basically, the RAM clear switch 192 cannot be operated unless the person is an employee of the game parlor who can open and close the front door 23. In other words, the RAM clear switch 192 can be said to be an operating means that cannot be operated by the player. When the RAM clear switch 192 is subjected to a specific operation (e.g., pressing the RAM clear switch 192 for a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds), pressing the RAM clear switch 192 a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times)), the RAM clear switch 192 A detection signal indicating that is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 101. In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 192 is provided on the power supply board 190, but the location of the RAM clear switch 192 can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be provided on the game control board 100 or a dedicated board. You can leave it there. Further, the operation mode of the RAM clear switch 192 for clearing the RAM is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 is mounted on the game control board 100, which controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the game ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY and allows balls to be rented based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and sends a detection signal (contact detection signal) to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175. Output. That is, the touch switch 72a outputs a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 (turns ON) when the handle 72k is touched, and outputs a contact detection signal to the payout control board 170 when the handle 72k is not touched. No (turn off). Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k.

The payout control board 170 is capable of controlling the firing device 72, and controls the firing device 72 on the condition that the contact detection signal from the touch switch 72a is in the ON state, in other words, the handle 72k is in the state of being touched by the player. Allow the game ball to be fired. Therefore, when the contact detection signal is in the OFF state, in other words, when the handle 72k is not touched by the player, the firing device 72 cannot fire the game ball. In a state where the firing of the game ball is permitted, the firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko game machine PY according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 41k and the second performance button 42k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the production control board 120 include a first production button sensor 41a and a second production button sensor 42a. The first performance button sensor 41a detects that the first performance button 41k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 42a detects that the second performance button 42k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 41a and the second performance button sensor 42a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal according to the detected content to the performance control board 120.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the production control board 120 include a motor 55m1 for rotating the board movable body, and a motor 55m2 for lifting and lowering the board movable body. The plate movable body rotation motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The board movable body lifting motor 55m2 can raise or lower the lifting member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the Pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting slot 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY performs a series of games such as a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired special symbol random number with the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY compares the acquired reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.'' Also, a "loss without reach" is sometimes referred to as a "do-no-lose", and a "lose with a reach" is sometimes referred to as a "lose-to-reach".

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. The contents of L Reach's production include videos of scenes different from the matches related to SP Reach, which will be described later, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn special moves.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot may be collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss may be collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that instead of all of these three types of specific gaming states being installed in the pachinko gaming machine PY, some of the three types of specific gaming states can also be installed.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state." On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is defined as "non-time saving". "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, in the time saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the three conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the normal game state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a specific gaming state Pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 32. Note that the pachinko game machine PY is associated with a baseball story with a main character and an enemy character as a theme for presentation purposes.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first effect button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure variation display starts for the first time after the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first stage before the reach occurs, and the second stage after the reach is established in the case where a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode can be set in the "low-probability, high-base gaming state" or "high-probability, high-base gaming state," and is either the low-probability, high-base gaming state or the high-probability, high-base gaming state; This is a production mode that indicates the state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

In addition, the time-saving performance mode can be set only in the low probability high base gaming state, and can also be set as a performance mode indicating the low probability high base gaming state.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 41, and a second presentation button device 42 is provided. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

In addition, as described later, in the special pattern variation performance, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner, but ultimately the special symbol lottery results (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type, reach determination result) are shown. The stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in this manner. When announcing a jackpot as a result of the special drawing lottery, performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed so that three performance symbols G10 of the same number are lined up side by side (so-called "Zero"). Therefore, hereinafter, the effect pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed when notifying a jackpot will be referred to as a "jackpot effect pattern." For example, if the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed as "7, 7, 7," the jackpot design will be "performance symbol G10g," and if they are statically displayed as "9, 9, 9," the jackpot design will be " The production pattern is G10i. Furthermore, the jackpot effect symbols may be abbreviated by numbers included in the effect symbols. For example, if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10g", the jackpot effect pattern will be "7", and if the jackpot effect pattern is "performance pattern G10i", the jackpot effect pattern will be "9". Furthermore, as will be described later, in the special symbol variation performance, the special symbol lottery result is completely displayed when the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed. However, basically, in the middle of the special symbol variation performance, before the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). This is because the contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped and displayed may be changed. For example, after the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a jackpot (relatively disadvantageous to the player), they are changed to a mode indicating another jackpot (relatively advantageous to the player). may be done. Therefore, when the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner that first indicates a jackpot (before they are changed), the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers that constitute the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. It is also referred to as a ``jackpot effect pattern''.

In addition, in the special pattern variation production, the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, but in the middle of the variation display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 are the production symbol G10 with the same number. Reach may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop display). As will be described later, reach is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and by reaching reach, the chance of winning a jackpot has increased. Therefore, the performance pattern G10 consisting of the same numbers forming the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 related to the reach is referred to as a "reach performance pattern". For example, when the left production symbol EZ1 and the right production symbol EZ3 temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “1”, the reach production symbol becomes “production symbol G10a”, and when they temporarily stop display at the production symbol G10a of “3” , the reach effect pattern becomes “effect pattern G10c”. Furthermore, the reach effect design may be abbreviated by the number included in the effect pattern. For example, if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10a", the ready-to-win performance symbol is abbreviated as "1", and if the ready-to-win performance symbol is "performance symbol G10c", the ready-to-reach performance symbol is abbreviated as "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of first performing normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Towards the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20(D), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops (temporarily stops) at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. Temporarily stops (temporary stop) at the center position.

Finally, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) in a horizontally lined state at approximately the vertical center position, are completely stopped all at once as shown in FIG. 20(F). , and the stop is confirmed (the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), come to a complete stop, that is, when the final stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to EZ3 KZ3 stops all at once at the same random number as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

Note that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stop means that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 do not move greatly as in a scroll display, but slightly shake or make small reciprocating motions on the spot. Therefore, strictly speaking, the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed is different from the state in which the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitively stopped and displayed, but this provisional stop display and A definitive stop display is sometimes referred to as a "stop display" in a broad sense. In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the performance symbols are stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3 → middle performance symbol EZ2, but the order of stopping ( The method) is not limited to this and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbols starts from a state where the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in FIG. 21(B), the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and at the same time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. As shown in 21(D), the right effect symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. When a reach is achieved, an image G11 indicating that a reach is achieved (a reach suggesting image) is displayed. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the production symbols are temporarily stopped (temporary stop) in the order of left production symbol EZ1 → right production symbol EZ3, but the order (method) of temporary stopping is as follows. It is not limited to , and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Further, the position where the vehicle is temporarily stopped (temporary stop) is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), from the state where reach is established, the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily be at approximately the center position in the vertical direction. The game stops (temporarily stops), and a stop display of the production pattern indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state changes to a complete stop state, as shown in Figure 22 (D-1), and the loss peculiar to a reach loss occurs. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed with the eyes.

In addition, when the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped (temporary stop) completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the stop display of the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, 3 The three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 stop all at once at the same loss points as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are unique to a reach loss, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol fluctuation effect does not end at N reach, as shown in FIG. 22 (C-2), when the remaining medium effect symbol EZ2 that has not stopped changes again at high speed, the entire display section 50a gradually changes. It becomes whiter, and as shown in FIG. 22 (D-2), after whiteout, it may develop (switch) to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, Thule related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl comes. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After the image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-1), the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character will be displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined Thule develops. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, it consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in a baseball game from the standpoint of a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and bat approach each other, and a scene appears where the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a performance suggesting a jackpot. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 41k, the second performance button 42k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period (operation valid period) occurs during which the pressing operation of the first production button 41k is valid, and along with the occurrence of this operation valid period, , as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (operation promotion performance) that prompts the user to operate the first performance button 41k is performed.

In the operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 41k to be operated, and an image (pressing (operation image) G12b, and an image (operation valid period remaining time image) G12c representing the remaining time of the valid operation period (operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 41k.

Note that the operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation valid period. Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 41k is pressed during the operation validity period, or after the first production button 41k is pressed during the operation validity period, After the remaining time of the valid operation period runs out without any operation of 41k, the operation result presentation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result production. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 41k is pressed during the operation validity period, or the first production button 41k is pressed Even if the remaining time of the performance button operation validity period runs out without being executed, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold for which no jackpot judgment has been made, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Moreover, the display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. In the display area 50e, the icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the "hold effect" corresponding to special drawing 1 hold is Although not included, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, hereinafter, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "hold effect". Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly shown by broken lines; This is written to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown). to the first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when changing from a hold icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when moving the icon from the hold display area 50d to the relevant display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the reserved display area 50d to the display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko game machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold change notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending change notice is given, the player can have the expectation that he may win the jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. . Next, a specific example of the pending change notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension change notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

As one type of reservation change notice, the special mode becomes immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, the reservation change notice is given when the special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning the first starting opening 11). There is a pending notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, even if you try to make it completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the It may also be configured so that it sways slightly in the field.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (a pending change notice is given). In the example of FIG. 31, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation change notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, the reservation change notice is given at the time of the shift of special drawing 1 reservation. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 that was displayed moves to the corresponding display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation change notice, and to make the jackpot expectation level different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from execution until the special symbol fluctuation display starts, such as a pending change notice by a pending icon HA, a stop display of production symbols is also available. It is also possible to use an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the effect is performed or the variable display of the effect symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed.

In the power-on process, the gaming control microcomputer 101 first sets permission for access to the gaming RAM 104. This makes it possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 192 mounted on the game control board 100 has been specifically operated (ON or not).

If the RAM clear switch 192 has not been specifically operated, the game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the power-off flag is ON. The power outage flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of a power outage, and is a flag that is turned on in a power outage monitoring process that will be described later.

If the power-off flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 101 calculates a checksum and compares it with the checksum calculated at the time of the power-off. The checksum is calculated by considering the gaming information stored in the gaming RAM 104 as numerical values.

If the checksum values match, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the storage contents of the gaming RAM 104 are normal, and manages the setting of the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when the power is restored. In this setting process, the power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the power-off flag and performs a power-on command setting process.

In the power-on command setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process for outputting a power-on command to the production control board 120 after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, a predetermined time until the power-on command is output is set in a timer, and subtraction of the time set in the timer is started. When the value of the subtracted timer becomes "0", it means that a predetermined time has elapsed, so a power-on command is set in a predetermined output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Thereby, the set power-on command is outputted to the production control board 120 in an output process (S101) described later. Furthermore, the power restoration information includes information indicating the gaming state at the time of power outage. Therefore, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a command (gaming state designation command) indicating the gaming state at the time of power outage included in the power restoration information in a predetermined output buffer along with the power-on command. Thereby, the set gaming state designation command is outputted to the production control board 120 together with the power-on command in an output process (S101) to be described later.

In addition, if the power-off flag is not ON, the power may not have been properly shut off, or if the RAM clear switch 192 has been operated in a specific manner, the game control microcomputer 101 will Clear all stored game information. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 101 initializes the work area of the gaming RAM 104. In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the gaming ROM 103 is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the production control board 120 to notify that the RAM has been cleared, and performs a power-on command setting process.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 101 disables interrupts (S002) and executes the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. Counters related to various random numbers (random number counters) are means for generating random numbers using software. When the counter value (random number counter value) of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are permitted, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while the interrupt is disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after the interrupt is enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. In other words, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) executed again, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls (“2” in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the number of winnings (the prescribed number of winnings) in the big winning hole 14 related to prize balls in one round game is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the grand winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning to the grand winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the grand winning hole 14. In addition, when the game ball is won in the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the game control microcomputer 101 issues a command that specifies that a prize has been won in the grand prize opening 14 (great prize opening prize command). may be transmitted to the production control board 120. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 performs production control of a command (big winning hole prize ball command) that specifies that a prize ball is paid out based on a winning hole in the big winning hole 14 in the big winning hole prize ball process (S224). It may also be transmitted to the board 120.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, the special figure 2 related judgment information is not stored. It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), special symbol variable display and jackpot game state are performed. A command (customer waiting command) indicating that the machine is in a waiting state for customers is set in the output buffer (S1619), a customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is finished.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the set special figure 1 variation start command includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, there is one or more stored special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

In the basic embodiment as described above, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the basic embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the special symbol fluctuation display is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, if the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( A normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time (from the moment the player is hit until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko game machine PY is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a (performs various effects using the image) according to the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The production control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 41a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 42a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs timer update processing (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt process will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process that analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be explained in detail in the basic embodiment described below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to the pending change notice in which the pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing a prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. Sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading effect using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (performing a pre-reading effect using light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute a pre-read effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process advances to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage section 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

The performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for determining the special pattern variation performance pattern with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table in the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. At the same time, the data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern (special figure fluctuation performance pattern data) representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using the images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using the sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using the light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure fluctuation performance and the performance content of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes the special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variable display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs customer waiting performance standby processing. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 30 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on a timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, whereas if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the production control microcomputer 121 executes the jackpot with the start of the opening of the jackpot game. Opening performance start processing is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is to be executed, select the performance content (jackpot opening performance pattern) of the jackpot opening performance, and output a jackpot opening performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round production according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round production. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the production control microcomputer 121 sets it to a probability variable production mode that suggests a high probability high base gaming state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is jackpot symbol B, jackpot symbol C, or jackpot symbol E, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects either a high probability high base gaming state or a low probability high base gaming state. Set a time-saving production mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state is different from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in the non-time saving state described in the basic embodiment. Different from the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 48 shows a configuration example of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time-saving state according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure 1 variation patterns that can be determined in a non-time-saving state include jackpot variations THP01 to THP04, reach and loss variations THP11 to THP15, and no-reach variations THP21 to THP23.

In the case of a jackpot, THP01 is determined with a probability of 20%, THP02 is determined with a probability of 10%, THP03 is determined with a probability of 65%, and THP04 is determined with a probability of 5%.

In the case of a loss with reach, there is a 3% probability that THP11 is determined, a 2% probability that THP12 is determined, a 10% probability that THP13 is determined, a 30% probability that THP14 is determined, and a 55% probability that THP14 is determined. The probability is determined to be THP15.

If there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 0 to 2, there is an 80% probability that THP21 will be decided, a 15% probability that THP22 will be decided, and a 5% probability that THP23 will be decided. . On the other hand, if there is no reach and the number of reserved special drawings is 3 to 4, there is a 5% probability that THP21 will be decided, a 10% probability that THP22 will be decided, and an 85% probability that THP23 will be decided. be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the normal fluctuation described in the basic embodiment, In addition to reach, N reach, L reach, and SP reach, there is SPSP reach.

The SPSP reach can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Specifically, SPSP reach is an effect that suggests that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot game state than SP reach.

Moreover, SPSP reach can be executed progressively from L reach. In other words, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since L reach was started, the L reach is switched to SPSP reach. Similarly, SPSP Reach can be performed incrementally from SP Reach. In other words, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since SP reach was started, it switches from SP reach to SPSP reach.

In addition, in SPSP reach, the reach that was established in L reach or SP reach that was executed before the SPSP reach is executed is maintained as it is. However, in response to switching to SPSP reach, the reach effect design related to the previous L reach or SP reach may change (promote) to one indicating that there is a relatively high possibility of a jackpot game state. You may also make it so that there is. In other words, the so-called "blue design" may change to the so-called "red design".

Further, in the following, the point in time when L reach switches from L reach to SPSP reach will be referred to as "L reach SPSP development point." Similarly, the point in time when SP reach switches from SP reach to SPSP reach is referred to as "SP reach SPSP development point." Note that the L reach SPSP development point belongs to the middle stage of the L reach, and is earlier than the winning/losing turning point related to the L reach. Similarly, the SP reach SPSP development point belongs to the middle stage of the SP reach and is earlier than the winning/losing point related to the SP reach.

In SPSP reach, a background image dedicated to SPSP reach (background image for SPSP reach) G116 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Although the specific display content of the SPSP reach background image G116 can be set as appropriate, in the first embodiment, the SPSP reach background image G116 is composed of a 3DCG moving image. A predetermined story (specific story) is associated with the moving image constituting the SPSP reach background image G116. This predetermined story is set in such a way that the director of the main character worked at a company before becoming a director, and mainly consists of reminiscences of the director's work when he was working for a company. Note that, hereinafter, the predetermined story related to this SPSP reach background image G116 may be referred to as a "specific story".

In addition, the background image for SPSP reach G116 is configured similarly to the background image for SP reach G115 and the background image for L reach G114, and as the specific story progresses in the background image for SPSP reach G116, the background image for SPSP reach is changed. In the final phase, a turning point (so-called ``win/lose turning point'') is reached where the performance that suggests a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or the performance that suggests a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. If it is a jackpot variation (long SPSP jackpot variation, short SPSP jackpot variation), a SPSP reach-dedicated jackpot suggestion performance is executed, and then performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a jackpot are displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the case of a loss variation (long SPSP loss variation, short SPSP loss variation), a loss suggestion performance exclusively for SPSP reach is executed, and then performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a loss are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the time from the start of SPSP reach until reaching the winning/losing point is approximately 60 seconds, and from the start of SP reach or L reach until reaching the winning/losing turning point. is set longer than the time of

Next, the flow of the special symbol variation performance (performance flow) based on each special symbol variation pattern will be explained.

In the special figure variation effects based on THP21 to THP23, normal variations with different production times are performed, and the special figure variation effects end with the normal variations.

In the special figure variation effect based on THP13, a reach is established after the normal variation, an N reach is executed after the reach is established, and the special figure variation effect ends at the N reach.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP01 and THP11, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After reach is established, N reach is executed, and N reach develops into SP reach. Then, when the SP reach is executed to the middle (middle stage) and the SP reach reaches the SPSP development point, it develops into the SPSP reach, and the SPSP reach is executed to the end, and the special symbol variation performance ends at the SPSP reach.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP02 and THP12, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After the reach is established, the N reach is executed and the N reach develops into the L reach. Then, when the L reach is executed to the middle (middle stage) and the L reach reaches the SPSP development point, it develops into the SPSP reach, and the SPSP reach is executed to the end, and the special symbol variation performance ends at the SPSP reach.

In the special figure variation performance based on THP03 and THP13, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After reach is established, N reach is executed, and N reach develops into SP reach. Then, the SP reach is executed to the end, and the special symbol variation effect ends with the SP reach.

In the special symbol variation performance based on THP04 and THP14, the reach is established after the normal variation is executed first. After the reach is established, the N reach is executed and the N reach develops into the L reach. Then, the L reach is executed to the end, and the special symbol variation effect ends at the L reach.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the second item from the right in the configuration example of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table in FIG. The name shown in ``Name of Figure Fluctuation Pattern'' is given. For example, the jackpot special pattern variation pattern "THP01" that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach is called "long SPSP jackpot variation", and the jackpot special pattern variation pattern "THP02" that develops from L reach to SPSP reach is called "short SPSP jackpot variation". "Jackpot fluctuation", and the losing special pattern fluctuation pattern "THP11" that develops from SP reach to SPSP reach is called "Long SPSP losing fluctuation", and the losing special winning fluctuation pattern that develops from L reach to SPSP reach "THP12" is called "short SPSP loss fluctuation".

Furthermore, jackpot fluctuations related to SPSP reach (long SPSP jackpot fluctuations, short SPSP jackpot fluctuations) are collectively referred to as "SPSP jackpot fluctuations," and loss fluctuations related to SPSP reach (long SPSP jackpot fluctuations, short SPSP loss fluctuations) are collectively referred to as "SPSP jackpot fluctuations". This is collectively referred to as "SPSP loss fluctuation." In addition, special symbol fluctuation patterns related to SPSP reach (SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SPSP loss fluctuation) are collectively referred to as "SPSP reach fluctuation."

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, in the normal game state and in the special figure variation performance in the normal performance mode, apart from the performance flow composition performances such as reach and various reach performances, a game state that is advantageous to the player is entered. A specific performance that suggests that there is a possibility, in other words, a specific performance that increases the chance of a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, may be executed on the display section 50a.

Types of specific effects include a first specific effect, a second specific effect, and a third specific effect. The first specific performance is executed in normal variation. The second specific performance is executed at N reach. The third specific performance is executed in a period before the L reach SPSP development point in the L reach and a period before the SP reach SPSP development point in the SP reach.

Although the first specific performance, second specific performance, and third specific performance differ from each other in the content of the performance, they all have in common that they are composed of image displays involving the director of the main character.

Specific examples of various specific effects will be described later, but in the first specific effect, an image (first specific effect image) G51 associated with the first specific effect is displayed on the display section 50a, and in the second specific effect, the image G51 is displayed on the display unit 50a. An image (second specific effect image) G52 associated with the second specific effect is displayed on the display section 50a, and in the third specific effect, an image (third specific effect image) G53 associated with the third specific effect is displayed. It is displayed on the display section 50a.

The first specific effect image G51 is composed of a still image showing a director character toasting with a wine glass. The second specific performance image G52 is composed of a moving image showing the director character playing Kendama. The third specific performance image G53 is composed of a still image showing the director character encouraging the main character (A-Taro) by saying, "A-Taro, do your best!"

By the way, as mentioned above, in the background image G116 for SPSP Reach displayed in SPSP Reach, a video of the director character reminiscing about his past work at a company is displayed. They are common in that they consist of displays and include the director's character in the image. Therefore, hereinafter, the SPSP reach and various specific performances may be collectively referred to as "director's performance." In addition, the various director effects function as effects that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state in the pachinko game machine PY1 (which increases the chance of becoming in an advantageous game state), but in detail, It functions as an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of becoming a jackpot gaming state (which greatly increases the chances of reaching an advantageous gaming state).

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, when the director performance is executed in the special figure variation performance, it is sometimes executed once and sometimes twice. In pachinko gaming machine PY1, there is a high possibility that the jackpot game state suggested by various director effects is high, but if the director effect is executed twice in one special figure variation effect, the jackpot game state will be reached. There is a very high possibility that this will happen. That is, executing the director's performance twice suggests that there is an extremely high possibility of a jackpot game state.

Furthermore, basically, when a director's performance is executed regardless of the type, a precursor performance indicating that the director's performance will be executed is executed. The omen effect is composed of image display on the display section 50a. In the omen effect, an image (omen effect image) G50 associated with the omen effect is displayed on the display section 50a. The omen effect image G50 is composed of a still image in which the characters "Director" are displayed inside a white circle.

In addition, in the first embodiment, whether the director effect is executed once or twice in one special figure variation effect, the precursor effect is executed only once. Therefore, the execution of one precursor direction generally notifies the execution of the director's direction, and the notification includes notification of one execution of the director's direction and notification of two executions of the director's direction. include.

Next, the execution timings of various director performances and the execution timings of precursor performances will be explained. FIG. 49 shows the execution timing and precursors of various director performances in long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP loss fluctuation, short SPSP loss fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation, and L loss fluctuation. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the execution timing of a performance. In FIG. 49, regarding timing S, timing T, timing U, timing V, timing W, and timing X related to the director's performance, which will be described later, "S", "T", "U", "V", " It is plotted with a downward-pointing white triangular arrow while being written as "W" and "X". In addition, regarding timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F related to the omen effects described later, "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", and It is written as "F" and plotted with a downward pointing black triangular arrow.

The first specific production is the normal variation of long SPSP jackpot variation, short SPSP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, L jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, short SPSP loss variation, SP loss variation, and L loss variation (special symbol variation production ) is executed. In detail, the performance time of the first specific performance is 2 seconds, and the first specific performance starts when 3 seconds have elapsed since the normal fluctuation started.

The second specific performance is executed in N reaches of long SPSP jackpot variation, short SPSP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, L jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, short SPSP loss variation, SP loss variation, and L loss variation. In detail, the performance time of the second specific performance is 5 seconds, and the second specific performance starts when 5 seconds have passed since the start of N reach.

The third specific performance is in the SP reach of long SPSP jackpot fluctuation, SP jackpot fluctuation, long SPSP loss fluctuation, and SP loss fluctuation, and the L reach of short SPSP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, short SPSP loss fluctuation, and L loss fluctuation. executed. Specifically, the performance time of the third specific performance is 3 seconds. In the case of long SPSP jackpot variation, SP jackpot variation, long SPSP loss variation, and SP loss variation, the third specific performance starts when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of SP reach. On the other hand, in the case of a short SPSP jackpot variation, an L jackpot variation, a short SPSP loss variation, and an L loss variation, the third specific performance starts when 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the L reach.

SPSP reach is performed with a long SPSP jackpot variation, a long SPSP loss variation, a short SPSP jackpot variation, and a short SPSP loss variation. In the case of long SPSP jackpot fluctuations and long SPSP loss fluctuations, SPSP reach starts when 30 seconds have elapsed since SP reach started. That is, SPSP reach is switched from the middle of SP reach, and in other words is executed progressively. On the other hand, in the case of short SPSP jackpot fluctuations and short SPSP loss fluctuations, SPSP reach starts when 15 seconds have passed since the start of L reach. That is, the SPSP reach is switched from the middle of the L reach, and in other words is executed progressively.

Note that in the following, the timing at which various director performances start may be referred to as "direction execution timing." Then, the timing for supervising the first specific performance is referred to as "timing S," the timing for supervising the second specific performance is referred to as "timing T," and the timing for supervising the third specific performance related to L reach is "timing U." ”, the timing of supervising the third specific performance related to SP reach is called “timing V”, the timing of supervising the SPSP reach related to L reach is called “timing W”, and the timing of supervising the third specific performance related to SP reach is called “timing W”, and the timing of supervising the third specific performance related to SP reach is called “timing W”, The execution timing is referred to as "timing X."

In addition, the performance content of the third specific performance when executed with L reach and the content of the third specific performance when executed with SP reach are the same, but below, the content of the third specific performance when executed with L reach is the same. The 3rd specific performance may be referred to as the "3rd specific performance (L)", and the 3rd specific performance executed with SP reach may be referred to as the "3rd specific performance (SP)". Furthermore, the performance content of SPSP reach when executed progressively from L reach and the content of SPSP reach when executed progressively from SP reach are the same, but in the following, The SPSP reach that is executed in advance is sometimes referred to as "SPSP reach (L)," and the SPSP reach that is executed progressively from SP reach is sometimes referred to as "SPSP reach (SP)."

On the other hand, a plurality of timings at which the omen effects start are set. In the following, the timing at which the harbinger effect starts may be referred to as the "harbinger execution timing." Timing A, timing B, timing C, timing D, timing E, and timing F are set as the precursor execution timings.

Timing A is the point in time when one second has passed since the normal variation (special figure variation effect) was started, in other words, two seconds before timing S. Timing B is the time point when 3 seconds have passed since the start of N reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing T. Timing C is a point in time when 6 seconds have passed since the start of L reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing U. Timing D is 13 seconds after the start of SP reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing V. Timing E is 13 seconds after the start of L reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing V. Timing F is 28 seconds after the start of SP reach, in other words, 2 seconds before timing W. Note that the performance time of the omen performance is set to 2 seconds.

Furthermore, as described above, the director performance may be performed once or twice in one special figure variation performance. Patterns in which the director's performance is performed once (director's performance once pattern) include a pattern in which the first specific performance is performed (director's performance once pattern 1) and a pattern in which the second specific performance is performed (director's performance once pattern 1). One performance pattern 2), a pattern in which the third specific performance (L) is performed (one time supervisory performance pattern 3), and a pattern in which the third specific performance (SP) is performed (one time supervisory performance pattern 4) There are a pattern in which SPSP reach (L) is executed (one time director's performance pattern 5) and a pattern in which SPSP reach (SP) is executed (one time director's performance pattern 6). On the other hand, patterns in which the director's performance is performed twice (director's performance twice pattern) include a pattern in which the first specific performance and the second specific performance are performed (directed performance twice pattern 1), A pattern in which the production and the third specific production (L) are executed (two-time director's production pattern 2) and a pattern in which the first specific production and the third specific production (SP) are executed (two-time director's production pattern 3). ), a pattern in which the first specific effect and SPSP reach (L) are executed (director effect twice pattern 4), and a pattern in which the first specific effect and SPSP reach (SP) are executed (director effect twice) Pattern 5), a pattern in which the second specific production, and the third specific production (L) are executed (director production twice pattern 6), the second specific production, and the third specific production (SP) are executed. The pattern (Director's performance twice pattern 7), the second specific performance, and the pattern in which SPSP Reach (L) is executed (Director's performance twice pattern 8), the second specific performance, and SPSP Reach (SP) are executed. A pattern in which the third specific performance (L) and SPSP reach (L) are executed (two-time director performance pattern 10), a third specific performance (SP), and a pattern in which SPSP reach (SP) is executed (two-time director performance pattern 11).

Further, the execution timing at which the precursor performance can be started (executed) is associated with the pattern in which the director performance is executed (one-time director performance pattern, two-time director performance pattern).

The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 1 is timing A. Execution timings at which the precursor performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 2 are timing A and timing B. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 3 are timing A, timing B, and timing C. Execution timings at which the precursor performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 4 are timing A, timing B, and timing D. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 5 are timing A, timing B, timing C, and timing E. Execution timings at which the precursor performance can be started (executed) in the one-time director performance pattern 6 are timing A, timing B, timing D, and timing F.

The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 1 is timing A. The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 2 is timing A. The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 3 is timing A. The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 4 is timing A. The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the director performance twice pattern 5 is timing A. The execution timing at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 6 is timing A. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 7 are timing A and timing B. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 8 are timing A and timing B. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 9 are timing A and timing B. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 10 are timing A, timing B, and timing C. Execution timings at which the foreshadowing performance can be started (executed) in the two-time director performance pattern 11 are timing A, timing B, and timing D.

In this way, when the director performance is performed once in one special figure variation performance, the precursor performance is always performed before that. Furthermore, when the director's performance is performed twice in one special figure variation performance, the precursor performance is always performed before the first supervisor's performance.

In addition, the precursor execution timing is set 2 seconds before the director execution timing of various director productions, and the production time of the precursor production is 2 seconds, so the precursor production is executed at the most recent precursor execution timing of the various director productions. In this case, the foreshadowing performance and the supervisory performance will be executed continuously and integrally. Therefore, hereinafter, the precursor execution timing immediately before the director execution timing of various director performances may be referred to as "the precursor execution timing corresponding to the director performance." Therefore, the execution timing of the precursor corresponding to the director's performance for the first specific performance is timing A, the timing for executing the precursor corresponding to the director's performance for the second specific performance is timing B, and the timing for executing the precursor corresponding to the director's performance for the third specific performance (L). is timing C, the execution timing of the precursor corresponding to the director's performance of the third specific performance (SP) is timing D, the execution timing of the precursor corresponding to the director's performance of SPSP reach (L) is timing E, and the execution timing of the precursor corresponding to the director's performance of SPSP reach (L) is timing E. The timing for executing the precursor corresponding to the director's performance is timing F.

Next, specific examples of the foreshadowing performance and the supervisory performance will be explained. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a portent effect, FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a first specific effect, and FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a second specific effect. Yes, FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific performance (L), FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific performance (SP), and FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the third specific performance (SP). FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of (L), and FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of SPSP reach (SP).

As mentioned above, the omen effect can be started at various timings (timing A to timing F), but for example, the omen effect can be started at timing A (1 second after the normal variation (special figure variation effect) starts). When the performance is executed, when one second has elapsed since the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which had been displayed in a stopped state until then, started to be displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 50(B), As shown in , the entire display section 50a becomes white, and a large omen effect image G50 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a. Since the presentation time of the omen effect is 2 seconds, the omen effect ends when 2 seconds have elapsed since the omen effect started. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the precursor effect image G50 disappears and the entire display section 50a returns to its original state. However, if the first specific effect is executed after the omen effect, the first specific effect image G51 will be displayed without returning to the original background image as shown in FIG. 50(C).

The first specific performance is started at timing S in the normal variation. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(A), when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are being variably displayed in a superimposed manner on the first normal background image G111, when timing S comes, the image shown in FIG. 51(B) is displayed. As shown, the first specific effect image G51 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the performance time of the first specific performance is 2 seconds, the first specific performance ends when 2 seconds have passed since the first specific performance started. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the first specific effect image G51 disappears, and the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display section 50a. Effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are being displayed in a variable manner are displayed in a superimposed manner.

The second specific performance is started at timing T in N reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(A), when N reach is executed in a superimposed manner on the first normal background image G111, at timing T, as shown in FIG. 52(B), The second specific effect image G52 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. As mentioned above, the second specific performance image G52 is composed of a video showing the director character performing Kendama, so for example, as shown in FIGS. 52(B) to 52(D), the entire display section 50a is , a video in which the director character performs Kendama is displayed as the second specific effect image G52. Since the presentation time of the second specific presentation is 5 seconds, the second specific presentation ends when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the second specific presentation. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52(E), the second specific effect image G52 disappears, the entire display section 50a goes white out, the N reach ends, and then the L reach or the SP reach ends. Develop (switch).

The third specific performance (L) is started at timing U in L reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(A), when the L reach background image G114 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the L reach background image G114 has progressed to the scene related to timing U. As shown in FIG. 53(B), the third specific effect image G53 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the performance time of the third specific performance is 3 seconds, the third specific performance ends when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the third specific performance. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the third specific effect image G53 disappears, and the L reach background image G114 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. It is assumed that when the third specific effect image G53 is displayed, the display control of the L reach background image G114 is being performed inside the image control board 140. Therefore, when returning to the L reach background image G114, it is assumed that the moving image related to the L reach background image G114 has progressed for the performance time of the third specific performance.

The third specific performance (SP) is started at timing V in SP reach. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the SP reach background image G115 has progressed to the scene related to timing V. As shown in FIG. 54(B), the third specific effect image G53 is cut into the entire display section 50a. Since the performance time of the third specific performance is 3 seconds, the third specific performance ends when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the third specific performance. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(C), the third specific effect image G53 disappears, and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. It is assumed that when the third specific effect image G53 is displayed, the display control of the SP reach background image G115 is being performed inside the image control board 140. Therefore, when returning to the SP ready-to-reach background image G115, it is assumed that the moving image (specific story) related to the SP ready-to-reach background image G115 has progressed for the production time of the third specific production.

SPSP reach (L) is started at timing W in L reach (L reach SPSP development time). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(A), when the L reach background image G114 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the L reach background image G114 has progressed to the scene related to timing W. First, as shown in FIG. 55(B), the entire display section 50a becomes white-out, and then, as shown in FIG. 55(C), the SPSP reach background image G116 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Since the background image G116 for SPSP reach is composed of a moving image consisting of a specific story, the specific story is subsequently developed over the entire display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 55(D).

SPSP reach (SP) starts at timing X in SP reach (SP reach SPSP development time). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(A), when the SP reach background image G115 is displayed on the display unit 50a and the predetermined story related to the SP reach background image G115 has progressed to the scene related to timing X. First, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the entire display section 50a becomes white-out, and then, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the SPSP reach background image G116 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Since the background image G116 for SPSP reach is composed of a moving image consisting of a specific story, the specific story is subsequently developed over the entire display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 56(D).

In addition, in 1st Embodiment, the special symbol variation performance based on SPSP reach variation ends when SPSP reach is executed to the end. That is, when SPSP reach is started, a specific story progresses in the background image G116 for SPSP reach, and as described above, a winning or losing point is reached at the final stage. If the special symbol variation performance is related to the SPSP jackpot variation, a jackpot suggestion performance (not shown) is executed from the win/loss branch point, and finally the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a jackpot are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is a special symbol variation performance related to SPSP loss variation, a loss suggestion performance (not shown) is executed from the win/loss branch point, and finally performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a loss are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, although FIGS. 51 to 56 illustrate specific examples in which various types of director's effects are executed, in all cases, various types of director's effects are executed without the precursor effect being executed at the precursor timing corresponding to the director's effect. shall be. 50 (B) As shown in FIG. 51(B), FIG. 52(B), FIG. 53(B), FIG. 54(B), FIG. 55(B) , and the start of various director effects shown in FIG. 56(B). That is, on the display section 50a, it is assumed that the precursor effects and the various director effects are performed continuously and integrally.

Next, an example of control contents related to the director performance and the omen performance will be explained. Note that the control contents described below are examples of control contents related to the director performance and the omen performance, so the control contents are not limited to the following contents and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, the performance control microcomputer 121 checks the special symbol 1 variation pattern when the game is in the normal game state and in the normal performance mode.

The production control microcomputer 121 controls, when the special figure 1 variation pattern is a long SPSP jackpot variation or a long SPSP loss variation, the SPSP reach starts from the SPSP development point, and the special figure variation production ends at the SPSP reach. A special figure fluctuation start command indicating the contents of the effect to be performed is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. In addition, when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is a short SPSP jackpot fluctuation or a short SPSP loss fluctuation, the production control microcomputer 121 starts the SPSP reach from the point of L reach SPSP development, and the special figure fluctuation production with the SPSP reach. A special figure fluctuation start command indicating the performance content to be ended is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 sets special symbol variation start commands and special symbol variation production data related to L reach variation, SP reach variation, and SPSP reach variation in the production RAM 124, and then determines whether or not to execute a specific production. , and performs a specific performance determination for determining the performance type when the specific performance is executed.

The specific performance determination is executed with reference to the specific performance determination table. An example of the configuration of the specific performance determination table is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57, the specific performance determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the specific performance determination tables include a specific performance determination table for long SPSP jackpot fluctuations, a specific performance determination table for short SPSP jackpot fluctuations, a specific performance determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, and a specific performance determination table for L jackpot fluctuations. A determination table, a specific performance determination table for long SPSP loss fluctuations, a specific performance determination table for short SPSP loss fluctuations, a specific performance determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and a specific performance determination table for L loss fluctuations are provided. .

As shown in FIG. 57, the specific effect type and not to perform the specific effect are set as the determination results of each specific effect determination table. The specific performance type as a determination result includes execution of a specific performance. In other words, when a specific performance type is determined by the specific performance determination based on the specific performance determination table, the specific performance of that specific performance type will be executed in the special figure fluctuation performance that will start from now on, while the specific performance If it is decided not to execute, the specific effect will not be executed in the special figure variation effect that will be started from now on. It should be noted that the "specific performance type" as a determination result includes one type of specific performance type and a case where there are two specific performance types. When the two types are determined, the two determined types of specific effects will be executed in the special figure variation effect that will be started from now on.

Each specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 57 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each specific effect type and not performing the specific effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57. As shown in FIG. 57, any type of specific performance type may be determined not only in the case of a loss variation but also in the case of a jackpot variation. Therefore, the various specific performances are performances that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state, and are performances that increase the chance of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the case of SPSP reach fluctuation, two types of specific performance types are not selected. This is because in the first embodiment, the maximum number of executions of the director's performance in one special figure variation performance is two times, and in SPSP reach variation, the SPSP reach that constitutes the director's performance is always executed, and the SPSP This is because the number of executions of the director's direction that can be executed other than reach is one.

By the way, regarding the SP jackpot variation and SP loss variation, which are in a pair relationship with respect to the special figure variation production flow, the selection rate for each type of specific production type is higher in the case of the SP jackpot variation than in the case of the SP loss variation. is quite high. Similarly, regarding the L jackpot variation and L loss variation, which are in a pair relationship with respect to the special figure variation production flow, the selection rate for each one type of specific production type is higher in the case of the L jackpot variation than in the case of the L loss variation. is considerably more expensive. Therefore, in one special symbol variation performance, if a specific performance is executed once, it can be said that the possibility of a jackpot game state is higher than usual, regardless of the type of the specific performance.

Furthermore, regarding the SP jackpot fluctuations and the L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate for each type of specific performance type is higher overall than the selection rate for each of the two types of specific performance types. Similarly, regarding the SP loss variation and the L loss variation, the selection rate for each type of specific performance type is higher overall than the selection rate for each of the various two types of specific performance types. However, the ratio of the selection rate related to each type of specific performance type in SP jackpot fluctuation to the selection rate related to each type of specific performance type in SP loss fluctuation is higher than the ratio of selection rate related to each type of specific performance type in SP loss fluctuation. The ratio of the selection rate related to the two types of specific performance types in the SP jackpot fluctuation to the selection rate related to the performance type is extremely high. Similarly, the ratio of the selection rate related to each type of specific performance type in L jackpot variation to the selection rate related to each type of specific performance type in L loss variation is higher than the selection rate related to each type of specific production type in L loss variation. The ratio of the selection rate related to the two types of specific performance types in the L jackpot fluctuation to the selection rate related to the specific performance type is extremely high. Therefore, the possibility of becoming a jackpot game state when a director's performance other than SPSP reach is executed twice in a special figure fluctuation performance related to SP reach fluctuation or L reach is the same as the possibility of a jackpot game state when the director's performance is executed once. more likely than not to be in the condition. In other words, if a director performance other than SPSP Reach is executed twice in a special figure fluctuation performance related to SP Reach fluctuation or L Reach, there is an extremely high possibility that it will become a jackpot game state (the transition to a jackpot game state is highly likely). Become).

Furthermore, the selection rate for each type of specific performance type related to SPSP loss fluctuations is extremely low compared to the selection rate for each type of specific performance type related to SPSP jackpot fluctuations. Therefore, the possibility of a jackpot game state when the director's performance including SPSP reach is executed twice in the special figure fluctuation performance related to SPSP reach fluctuation is the same as the possibility of a jackpot when the director's performance including SPSP reach is executed once. This is higher than the possibility of being in a gaming state. In other words, if a special performance related to SPSP reach fluctuation is executed once, or in other words, a directed performance including SPSP reach is executed twice, there is an extremely high possibility that it will become a jackpot game state (to a jackpot game state) (the transition becomes thicker).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the director's performance is executed, the foreshadowing performance is performed before the director's performance is executed. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 is configured to control the performance when the director performance is executed in the special pattern variation performance that will start from now on, in other words, when the special pattern variation pattern is the SPSP reach variation, or when a specific production judgment is performed. If the performance type is determined, a first precursor performance execution timing determination is performed to determine the precursor execution timing.

The first precursor execution timing determination is performed with reference to the first precursor execution timing determination table. FIG. 58 shows an example of the configuration of the first precursor execution timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 58, the first sign execution timing determination table is associated with the type of director performance (supervisor performance type) executed in the special symbol variation performance.

FIG. 58(A) is a configuration example of the first omen execution timing determination table when the director effect is executed twice in the special figure variation effect. A first portent execution timing determination table for a specific performance and a second specific performance, a first specific performance, a first portent execution timing determination table for a third specific performance (L), a first specific performance, and a third specific performance. First omen execution timing determination table for production (SP), first specific production, and first omen execution timing judgment table for SPSP reach (L), first specific production, and first for SPSP reach (SP) A portent execution timing determination table, a second specific performance, a first portent execution timing determination table for the third specific performance (L), a second specific performance, and a first portent execution timing determination for the third specific performance (SP) table, second specific performance, and first portent execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), second specific performance, and first sign execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (SP), third specific performance (L) ), a first omen execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), and a first omen execution timing determination table for third specific performance (SP) and SPSP reach (SP).

FIG. 58(B) is a configuration example of the first omen execution timing determination table when the director effect is executed once in the special figure variation effect. First omen execution timing determination table for specific performance, first omen execution timing determination table for second specific performance, first omen execution timing determination table for third specific performance (L), third specific performance (SP) A first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (L), and a first precursor execution timing determination table for SPSP reach (SP) are provided.

Each of the first precursor execution timing determination tables shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B) shows that the selection rate for each precursor execution timing is the predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 58(A) and 58(B). It is appropriately configured so that. As mentioned above, the execution timing at which the precursor effect can be started is set depending on the type of director effect executed in the special figure variation effect.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 determined that the special symbol variation patterns indicated by the received special symbol variation start command were L reach variation and SP reach variation, and the result of the specific production determination was “do not execute specific production”. In this case, a precursor performance determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute the precursor performance.

The omen effect determination is executed with reference to the omen effect determination table. FIG. 59 shows an example of the structure of the omen effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 59, the precursor performance determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the precursor performance determination tables include a precursor performance determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a precursor performance determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a precursor performance determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and a precursor performance determination table for L loss fluctuations. There are tables. Each portent effect determination table shown in FIG. 59 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the portent effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59.

As shown in FIG. 59, "Execute" may be selected for both jackpot fluctuations and loss fluctuations. Therefore, if the precursor performance is executed but the specific performance is not executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot game state will occur. In detail, regarding the SP jackpot variation and SP loss variation, which are in a pair relationship with respect to the special figure variation production flow, the selection rate related to "execute the precursor effect" is higher in the case of the SP jackpot variation than in the case of the SP loss variation. is extremely high. Similarly, regarding the L jackpot variation and L loss variation, which are in a pair relationship with respect to the special symbol variation production flow, the selection rate related to "execute the precursor effect" is higher in the case of the L jackpot variation than in the case of the L loss variation. is extremely high. Therefore, if the precursor performance is executed but the specific performance is not executed, it can be said that the possibility of a jackpot game state is extremely high.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to "execute the precursor performance" in the precursor performance determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a second precursor execution timing determination for determining the precursor execution timing.

The second precursor execution timing determination is performed with reference to the second precursor execution timing determination table. FIG. 60 shows a configuration example of the second precursor execution timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 60, the second precursor execution timing determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the second precursor execution timing determination table includes a second precursor execution timing determination table for SP jackpot fluctuation, a second precursor execution timing determination table for L jackpot fluctuation, and a second precursor execution timing for SP loss fluctuation. A determination table and a second precursor execution timing determination table for L loss variation are provided. Each second precursor execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 60 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each precursor performance execution timing becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 60.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 performs the first precursor execution timing determination and the second precursor execution timing determination, the production control microcomputer 121 outputs a command (a precursor performance start command) indicating the precursor execution timing, which is the determination result, to the performance RAM 124. Set in buffer.

The precursor effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the omen effect start command, it executes the omen effect by displaying the omen effect image G50 on the display section 50a when the omen execution timing indicated by the omen effect start command comes. Let it start.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines any specific performance type in the specific performance type determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 sends a command (specific performance start command) indicating the specific performance type that is the determination result to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set.

The specific effect start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004). Upon receiving the specific production start command, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the following information on the display unit 50a when the execution timing (supervision execution timing) of the specific production related to the specific production type indicated by the specific production start command is reached. By displaying images (first specific performance image G51, second specific performance image G52, third specific performance image G53) corresponding to the specific performance type, various specific performances, in other words, director performance are started.

Further, as described above, the special figure variation performance start command set in the output buffer is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004). Therefore, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation effect start command related to SPSP reach, when the L reach SPSP development time or the SP reach SPSP development time comes, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the SPSP By displaying the reach background image G116, the SPSP reach, in other words, the director's performance is started.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the director's performance (specific performance) that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be executed, and the supervisor's performance (specific performance) Before executing, a precursor performance indicating that the director's performance (specific performance) will be executed may be performed, and if the supervisor's performance (specific performance) is not executed after the precursor performance is executed, it is a jackpot. Although the possibility of becoming a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) is higher than the possibility of not being in a gaming state (advantageous gaming state), it makes people look forward to the execution of the director's performance when the precursory performance is executed. Even when the director performance is not executed, the expectation of a jackpot game state can be maintained, so that the game interest is improved. In addition, since there are two types of director productions: a specific production (first specific production) and an SPSP reach (second specific production), which have different production modes, which type of production will occur when the precursor production is executed. Since the player can be excited as to whether the specific performance will be executed, the interest in the game is further improved. Furthermore, there are two types of precursory effects: cases that suggest that a specific effect (first specific effect) will be executed, and cases that suggest that SPSP reach (second specific effect) will be executed; Since both are executed in substantially the same presentation manner, it becomes difficult to understand which type of specific presentation is being executed, which further excites the player and improves the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the first embodiment, the supervisor performance and the precursor performance are executed in the normal game state and the normal performance mode, but the game state and performance mode in which the supervisor performance can be executed are not limited to the first embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. Also good. Further, the director performance and the precursor performance may be made executable in a plurality of types of game states and performance modes. Furthermore, the supervisory performance and the foreshadowing performance may be made executable while the special figure 2 variation is being performed.

The specific performance contents and execution (start) timing of the director performance and the omen performance are not particularly limited, so they may be changed as appropriate. Further, although the first specific performance and the second specific performance that constitute the director performance are executed at one timing, they may be executed at a plurality of timings.

Further, in the first embodiment, there are four types of director effects, but there may be one type, two types, or five or more types.

The upper limit of the number of executions of the director performance in one special figure variation performance is two times, but this upper limit may be one time, three times, or four times.

Whether the director's performance is performed once or twice in one special figure variation performance, a precursory performance with the same performance content is performed, but the performance of the precursory performance when it is performed once The mode may be different from the presentation mode of the omen effect when it is executed twice. Alternatively, a plurality of performance modes for the precursor performance may be set, and the degree of expectation for the number of times the director performance will be executed may vary depending on the performance mode of the precursor performance. For example, there are two production modes for a precursor production: a first production mode and a second production mode, and the level of expectation that the director's production will be executed twice is higher in the second production mode than in the first production mode. It may be said that it is expensive. Note that the presentation mode in this case includes the specific display content of the portent presentation image G50, the display position of the portent presentation image G50, the display time of the portent presentation image G50, and the like.

In addition, whether the director's performance is executed once or twice in one special figure variation performance, the precursor is always executed at the timing of the execution of the supervisor's performance corresponding to the type of director's performance to be executed. The performance may be executed. For example, when the second specific effect and the third specific effect (SP) are executed in one special figure variation effect, the precursor effect will be executed twice at timing B and timing D. In addition, in one special figure variation performance, when the first specific performance and SPSP reach (L) are executed, the precursor performance will be executed twice at timing A and timing E. Regarding the modification example, if the foreshadowing effect is executed but the supervisory effect is not executed, the foreshadowing effect may be executed at any omen execution timing. In this case, it may be possible that the foreshadowing performance is executed but the supervisory performance is not executed two or more times in one special figure variation performance. In this case, as the number of times the precursor performance is executed but the supervisor performance is not executed increases, the degree of expectation of shifting to the jackpot game state may be increased.

The director performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of shifting to a jackpot game state, but the target to suggest is not limited to the jackpot game state and may be changed as appropriate. For example, there is a jackpot game state in which the number of round games played is relatively high (the so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high), and a jackpot game state in which the number of round games played is relatively small (the so-called "ball output performance" is relatively high). There is a jackpot game state in which the number of rounds played is relatively high (the so-called "ball performance" is relatively high), and all or part of the director's performance can be shifted to a jackpot game state in which the so-called "ball performance" is relatively high. It may be a production that suggests that there is a sex. In addition, a jackpot gaming state with a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high-probability, high-base gaming state) and a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player (for example, a low-probability, high-base gaming state). There is a possibility that all or part of the director's performance will shift to a jackpot gaming state that is accompanied by a gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high-probability, high-base gaming state). It may be a production that suggests that.

Furthermore, the fact that the director's performance is executed twice in one special figure variation effect, and that the foreshadowing effect was executed in one special figure variable effect but the director's effect was not executed is a big hit game. However, in addition to or in place of the extremely high possibility of a jackpot game situation, both or one of these may indicate that the execution of a round game is relatively high. There is an extremely high possibility of transitioning to a jackpot game state with a large number of hits (so-called "ball payout performance" is relatively high), and/or a game state that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability high base game) It may also be possible to suggest that there is an extremely high possibility of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state.

Further, in the first embodiment, the director performance is executed in the special figure variation performance, but it may be configured to be executable in the jackpot game. In this case, for example, the director performance can be executed in a predetermined round game, and the jackpot game may end in the predetermined round game, or the jackpot game may continue to be executed. The execution of the director's performance may increase the chances of the jackpot game being executed continuously. Alternatively, the supervisory performance can be executed in a predetermined round game, and there is a case where the game state is shifted to the first game state in response to the end of the jackpot game, and a case where the supervisory performance is possible to be executed in a predetermined round game, and a case where the supervisory performance is executed in a predetermined round game and shifts to the first game state in response to the end of the jackpot game; There is a case where the player shifts to the second gaming state, and by executing a dialogue notice, the chances of shifting to the second gaming state may be increased in response to the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the director performance and the precursor performance can be executed as a look-ahead performance based on the look-ahead judgment result, and special figure fluctuations can be performed multiple times before the start of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 suspension related to the look-ahead judgment. It may be made executable throughout the performance.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the second embodiment will mainly be described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY2 according to the second embodiment displays a decoration image G60 in the vicinity of the reserved display area 50d of the display section 50a and the display area 50e in the normal performance mode. As described in the basic embodiment, the display unit 50a includes a first area 50d1 to a fourth area 50d4 (hold display area 50d) that display hold icons for hold orders 1 to 4, and Although the display area 50e to be displayed is formed, the pachinko gaming machine PY2 displays a decorative image directly below the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 (pending display area 50d) and the display area 50e in the normal production mode. Display G60.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the decorative image G60 displayed on the display section 50a. FIG. 61(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the entire display section 50a, and FIG. 61(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative image G60, the pending display area 50d, and , and an explanatory diagram showing the display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B), the decoration image G60 is formed into a horizontally long rectangular shape as a whole, and is normally displayed at the lower end of the display section 50a in the normal presentation mode. However, as will be described later, the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e may move integrally.

The decorative image G60 is basically superimposed on the normal background images G111 to 113, except when the customer waiting demonstration video G100, the L reach background image G114, and the SP reach background image G115 are displayed. will be displayed. In other words, a demonstration effect is executed (customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed) when no games such as special figure variable display or jackpot games are being played, or L reach or SP reach is executed during special figure variable display ( In a situation where the normal loss variation and N reach variation are repeatedly executed without displaying the background image G114 for L reach or the background image G115 for SP reach, the decorative image G60 is It continues to be displayed seamlessly across displays. Therefore, when a special figure stop display is performed in a manner that indicates a loss in a certain special figure variable display, and then the next special figure variable display is started, the decorative image G60 is , continues to be displayed seamlessly without changing.

Further, the decorative image G60 is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the reserved display area 50d, and is displayed adjacent to the lower side of the reserved icon placement image G60a on which the reserved icon is placed, and the display area 50e. , an icon placement image G60b on which the icon is placed, a pending icon placement image G60a, and a base image G60c such as a base that integrally supports the icon placement image G60b.

The pending icon placement image G60a further includes a first pending icon placement image G60a1 in which a pending icon (corresponding to pending order 1) is displayed in the first area 50d1, and a first pending icon placement image G60a1 that is displayed in the second area 50d2. A second pending icon placement image G60a2 in which a pending icon (corresponding to pending order 2) is placed, and a third pending icon in which a pending icon (corresponding to pending order 3) is displayed in the third area 50d3. It includes a placement image G60a3 and a fourth pending icon placement image G60a4 in which a pending icon (corresponding to pending order 4) displayed in the fourth area 50d4 is placed. The first pending icon placement image G60a1, the second pending icon placement image G60a2, the third pending icon placement image G60a3, the fourth pending icon placement image G60a4, and the icon placement image G60b are all of a low height. It represents the pedestal.

Next, the integral movement of the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e will be described. Note that in the second embodiment, any of the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e does not partially move independently from the others, and when they move, the decorative image G60, The pending display area 50d and the display area 50e move together. Therefore, in the following, the decoration image G60, the reservation display area 50d, and the display area 50e are basically considered to be integrated, and the decoration image G60, the reservation display area 50d, and the display area 50e are integrated. The display area 50e is representatively referred to as a "decoration image G60." Therefore, for example, "the decoration image G60 moves/the decoration image G60 moves" means "the decoration image G60, the pending display area 50d, and the display area 50e integrally move/the decorative image G60 and the pending display "The area 50d and the display area 50e move integrally."

Furthermore, the movement manner of the decorative image G60 includes a first movement manner and a second movement manner. In the first movement mode, the decorative image G60 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise as a whole when viewed from the front, and is moved to the left end of the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the second movement mode, the decorative image G60 is entirely rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and is moved to the right end of the display section 50a. Note that the mode of the decorative image G60 in which the decorative image G60 shown in FIG. It is positioned as

FIG. 62(A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the decorative image G60 in the first movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e, and FIG. 62(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the decorative image G60 in the first movement mode. , a pending display area 50d, and an explanatory diagram showing the display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), when the decorative image G60 enters the first movement mode, the display area 50e is relatively arranged at the upper end, and from there, the first area 50d1, A second region 50d2, a third region 50d3, and a fourth region 50d4 are arranged in order downward. In the second embodiment, the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the normal mode and the decorative image G60, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the first movement mode are , and the display positions are different, but the sizes of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the intervals between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, and the pending display area 50d and the display area are different. It is assumed that other elements such as the distance from 50e have not changed. Further, it is assumed that the pending icon and the size of the icon do not change between the case of the decorative image G60 in the normal mode and the case of the decorative image G60 in the first moving mode.

FIG. 63(A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the decorative image G60 in the second movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the display area 50e, and FIG. 63(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the decorative image G60 in the second movement mode. , a pending display area 50d, and an explanatory diagram showing the display area 50e in detail. As shown in FIGS. 63(A) and 63(B), when the decorative image G60 enters the second movement mode, the display area 50e is relatively arranged at the lower end, and from there, the first area 50d1, A second region 50d2, a third region 50d3, and a fourth region 50d4 are arranged in order upward. In the second embodiment, the decoration image G60, the hold display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the normal mode, and the decoration image G60, the hold display area 50d, and the display area 50e in the second movement mode are based on the posture. , and the display positions are different, but the sizes of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the display area 50e, the intervals between the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4, and the pending display area 50d and the display area are different. It is assumed that other elements such as the distance from 50e have not changed. It is also assumed that the pending icon and the size of the icon do not change between the decorative image G60 in the normal mode and the decorative image G60 in the second moving mode.

In addition, below, the display position on the display part 50a with respect to the decoration image G60 of the normal mode shown in FIG. 61(A), the pending display area 50d, and the said display area 50e as a whole is called a "normal position." Similarly, the display position on the display unit 50a with respect to the decorative image G60 in the first movement mode shown in FIG. The display position on the display unit 50a with respect to the decorative image G60 in the second movement mode, the reserved display area 50d, and the entire display area 50e shown in FIG. 63(A) is referred to as a "second special position." The "first special position" and the "second special position" may also be collectively referred to as the "special position."

Further, when the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e move to the first special position, the hold icon and the icon are also displayed at the first special position. Similarly, when the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e move to the second special position, the hold icon and the icon are also displayed at the second special position. Therefore, the movement of the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e can also be considered as movement of the hold icon or the icon.

Although not shown, the moving process when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the first special position can be set as appropriate. For example, the decorative image G60 can be moved from the situation shown in FIG. It rotates 90 degrees clockwise around the right end, and assumes an approximately vertical standing position near the right end of the display section 50a, and then moves to the left while maintaining this posture, and stands at the left end of the display section 50a. It is assumed that the vehicle stops nearby and enters the first movement mode shown in FIG. 62(A). Furthermore, when the decorative image G60 returns from the first special position to the normal position, it returns in a movement process that is reverse to the movement from the normal position to the first special position.

Furthermore, although not shown, the moving process when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the second special position can be set as appropriate; for example, the decorative image G60 can be moved from the situation shown in FIG. Rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise around the left end to take an approximately vertical standing position near the left end of the display section 50a, and move to the right while maintaining this position until the right end of the display section 50a 63(A), and the second moving mode shown in FIG. 63(A) is assumed. Furthermore, when the decorative image G60 returns from the second special position to the normal position, it returns in a movement process that is reverse to that when it moves from the normal position to the second special position.

Note that the movement of the decorative image G60, the hold display area 50d, and the display area 50e from the normal position to the first special position and the second special position is not displayed even when the icon or the hold icon is displayed. It shall be done in the same way even when there is no such thing. In addition, when moving to the first special position and the second special position when the icon or the hold icon is displayed in the hold display area 50d and the display area 50e at the normal position, the icon or the hold icon It is assumed that the positional relationship between the decorative image G60 and the decorative image G60 is maintained. In other words, when the decorative image G60 moves from the normal position to the first special position and the second special position, the icon or pending icon displayed there also rotates or moves integrally with the decorative image G60. shall be.

By the way, the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the first special position and the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the second special position are effects that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state, in other words. When executed, the performance improves the level of expectation (increases the chance) for transition to the jackpot game state. In the following, the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the first special position will be referred to as the "first holding position movement notice", and the movement of the decorative image G60 from the normal position to the second special position will be referred to as the "first holding position movement notice". 2. It is also sometimes referred to as ``notice of movement of pending position''. In the second embodiment, the possibility of a jackpot game state is higher when the second reservation position movement notice is executed than when the first reservation position movement notice is executed.

Note that the "first reservation position movement notice" and the "second reservation position movement notice" may be collectively referred to as "holding position movement notice." Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice are not executed together in one performance opportunity. That is, the first holding position movement notice is not executed continuously from the second holding position movement notice, and the second holding position movement notice is not executed continuously from the first holding position movement notice. In other words, the decorative image G60 that has been moved from the normal position to the first special position will not be further moved to the second special position. Similarly, the decorative image G60 that has been moved from the normal position to the second special position will not be further moved to the first special position. Therefore, when the first reservation position movement notice ends, the decoration image G60 returns to the normal position. Similarly, when the second holding position movement notice ends, the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position.

Further, in the second embodiment, as described later, the reservation position movement notice is executed as a pre-read effect based on the pre-read determination result. It is assumed that the reservation position movement advance notice starts when one second has elapsed since the reservation icon corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation related to the pre-reading determination was displayed. That is, when one second has elapsed since the reservation icon corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation related to the reservation position movement notice was displayed, the decoration image G60 is moved from the normal position to the special position.

Furthermore, in detail, when the look-ahead determination result is "SP jackpot variation", "L jackpot variation", "SP loss variation", "L loss variation", and "N loss variation", the pending position movement notice is executed. It is possible. That is, when the reservation position movement notice is executed, a reach is always established in the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the pre-read determination related to the reservation position movement notice. It is assumed that the pending position movement notice ends when the reach is established, and the decorative image G60 returns from the special position to the normal position during the period from when the reach is established until the start of the N reach.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY2, when special drawing 1 is held on hold, the hold icon appears in a normal manner. When the decorative image G60 is displayed at the normal position, when the decorative image G60 is displayed at the first special position (the first holding position movement notice is executed), the decorative image G60 is displayed at the second special position. When (the second hold position movement notice is executed), a hold change notice in which the hold icon in the normal mode changes to a special mode may be executed. In the second embodiment, when the decorative image G60 is displayed at the normal position (when the pending position movement notice is not executed)<when the decorative image G60 is displayed at the first special position (when the pending position movement notice is not executed) When the movement notice is being executed)<When the decoration image G60 is displayed at the second special position (when the second hold position movement notice is being executed), the hold change notice can be executed in the following order. Highly sexual.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY2, three types of special modes are set as special modes: a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode. In the second embodiment, the normal aspect is a white circle, the first special aspect is a green circle, the second special aspect is a red circle, and the third special aspect is a golden circle. It is. Then, in the order of the first special mode < the second special mode < the third special mode, there is a high possibility that the jackpot game state suggested by the special mode type will result.

Next, an example of the control contents related to the reservation position movement notice and the reservation change notice will be explained. The control content described below is an example of the control content related to the reservation position movement notice and the reservation change notice, so the control content is not limited to the following content and may be changed as appropriate. .

For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives the first starting winning command, it proceeds to step S4302, but in step S4302, it first indicates the reservation order related to the special drawing 1 holding corresponding to the first starting winning command, and A command (hold effect command) indicating that a hold icon is to be displayed in accordance with the occurrence of special figure hold 1, in other words, a jackpot judgment or the acquisition of the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display, is sent to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. set.

Next, if the special figure fluctuation display is currently in progress, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute a hold position movement notice based on the received first start winning command, and if it is to be executed, a hold position movement notice. (Holding position movement notice type: first holding position movement notice, second holding position movement notice). In addition, when the special figure variation display is not in progress, the performance control microcomputer 121 does not perform a reservation position movement advance notice determination, but performs a reserve change advance notice determination, which will be described later. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the reservation position movement advance notice will not be given for the special symbol 1 reservation that occurs when the special symbol variation display is not performed.

The reservation position movement advance notice determination is executed with reference to the reservation position movement advance notice determination table. FIG. 64 shows a configuration example of the reservation position movement advance notice determination table. As shown in FIG. 64, the reservation position movement advance notice determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern that is the pre-read determination result indicated by the first start winning command. Specifically, as the reservation position movement advance notice determination table, the reservation position movement advance notice determination table for SP jackpot fluctuation, the reservation position movement advance notice determination table for L jackpot fluctuation, the reservation position movement advance notice determination table for SP loss fluctuation, L A reservation position movement advance notice determination table for loss fluctuations, a reservation position movement advance notice determination table for N loss fluctuations, and a reservation position movement advance notice determination table for normal loss fluctuations are provided.

In each holding position movement notice determination table, "first holding position movement notice", "second holding position movement notice", and "not executed" are set as the judgment results. The "first holding position movement notice" as a determination result corresponds to executing the first holding position movement notice, and the "second holding position movement notice" as a judgment result corresponds to executing the second holding position movement notice. Correspondingly, the determination result "not executed" corresponds to not executing the pending position movement notice. Each holding position movement notice determination table shown in FIG. 64 is configured such that the selection rate for each judgment result (first holding position movement notice, second holding position movement notice, not executed) becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. , are configured accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 64, the "first reservation position movement notice" and the "second reservation position movement notice" may be selected in both cases of jackpot fluctuations and loss fluctuations. Therefore, when the first hold position movement notice or the second hold position movement notice is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot game state will occur. That is, the first hold position movement notice and the second hold position movement notice are performances that suggest that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state.

In addition, regarding SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the selection rate of the second reservation position movement notice is higher than the selection rate of the first reservation position movement notice, and regarding SP loss fluctuations and L loss fluctuations, the selection rate of the second reservation position movement notice is higher than that of the first reservation position movement notice. The selection rate for the first reservation position movement notice is higher than the selection rate for the second reservation position movement notice. Therefore, in general, when the second hold position movement notice is executed than when the first hold position movement notice is executed, the jackpot game based on the special figure variable display corresponding to the first start winning command is There is a high possibility that the condition will occur.

When the result of holding position movement notice determination is "first holding position movement notice" or "second holding position movement notice", the production control microcomputer 121 indicates the judgment result (holding position movement notice type). A command (pending position movement notice command) is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, in the following, when "1st reservation position movement notice" or "2nd reservation position movement notice" is selected in the reservation position movement notice determination, the special map 1 reservation that is the subject of the determination is referred to as " This is called ``Holding subject to advance notice of movement of hold position.'' That is, the reservation subject to the reservation position movement notice is the target of the reservation position movement notice, and the reservation position movement notice is positioned as an effect for the jackpot determination and special symbol 1 fluctuation display related to the reservation subject to the reservation position movement notice.

After completing the pending position movement notice determination, the production control microcomputer 121 then determines whether or not the pending change notice can be executed, and the type of special mode (first special mode, second special mode, third special mode) to be executed. A pending change notice judgment is performed to determine the condition). The pending change advance notice determination is executed with reference to the pending change advance notice determination table. Examples of the structure of the pending change notice determination table are shown in FIGS. 65-1 to 65-3.

As shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3, the reservation change notice determination table includes the special figure fluctuation pattern which is the pre-read determination result indicated by the start winning command, and the determination result of the reservation position movement notice determination (first reservation position movement notice, second hold position movement notice, not executed). Specifically, the pending change notice determination table includes a pending change notice decision table for SP jackpot variation, a pending change notice decision table for L jackpot variation, a pending change notice decision table for SP loss variation, and a pending change notice decision table for L loss variation. A pending change notice determination table, a pending change notice determination table for N loss variation, and a pending change notice determination table for normal loss variation are provided. Furthermore, in each reservation change notice determination table associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern, there is one associated with the reservation position movement notice determination result "1st reservation position movement notice" and the reservation change notice determination result "1st reservation position movement notice". There are two types: one that is associated with "No. 2 Holding Position Movement Advance Notice" and one that is associated with the Suspension Position Movement Advance Notice Judgment Result "Do Not Execute."

In each pending change notice determination table, "normal mode", "first special mode", "second special mode", and "third special mode" are set as the determination results. The "normal mode" as the determination result corresponds to the fact that the final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the normal mode and no pending change notice is executed, and the "first special mode" as the determination result is: The final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the first special mode, and in response to executing the pending change notice that changes the pending icon from the normal mode to the first special mode, the "second display mode" as a result of the determination is "Special mode" means that the final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the second special mode, and corresponds to executing a pending change notice that changes the pending icon from the normal mode to the second special mode, and the judgment result The "third special mode" means that the final display mode of the icon subject to the determination is the third special mode, and a pending change notice that changes the pending icon from the normal mode to the third special mode is executed. Compatible. Each pending change notice determination table shown in FIGS. 65-1 to 65-3 has a selection rate for each determination result (normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, and third special mode) in FIGS. 65-1 to 65-3. It is appropriately configured to achieve a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 65-3.

As shown in Figures 65-1 to 65-3, for SP jackpot fluctuation, L jackpot fluctuation, SP loss fluctuation, and L loss fluctuation, the reservation position movement advance notice determination result is "Do not execute" < "First reservation position The selection rate for all special aspects is high in the order of ``movement notice'' < ``second holding position movement notice''. In addition, regarding N reach variation, "2nd holding position movement notice" is never selected, but the holding position movement notification judgment result is "Not executed" < "1st holding position movement notice" in the order of special High selectivity for all aspects. Therefore, overall, there is a possibility that the pending change notice will be executed in the following order: When the pending position movement notice is not executed < When the first pending position movement notice is executed < When the second pending position movement notice is executed ( expectations) are high.

Furthermore, regarding SP jackpot fluctuations and L jackpot fluctuations, the holding position movement notice judgment result is "not executed" < "first holding position movement notice" < "second holding position movement notice", and the second special aspect , and the selection rate according to the third special aspect is high. Regarding SP loss fluctuations, the "third special aspect" is not selected in the case of "not executed" and "first holding position movement notice", but in the case of "second holding position movement notice" "Third special mode" may be selected, and the selection rate for the second special mode is determined in the order of "Do not execute" < "First holding position movement notice" < "Second holding position movement notice". expensive. Regarding L loss fluctuation, the "third special mode" is never selected, but the order of "do not execute" < "first holding position movement notice" < "second holding position movement notice" 2. The selection rate for the special aspect is high. Further, regarding the N loss variation, the second special mode and the third special mode are not selected. Therefore, in general, it is relatively possible to shift to a jackpot gaming state in the following order: When the hold position movement notice is not executed < When the first hold position movement notice is executed < When the second hold position movement notice is executed There is a high possibility that a pending change notice indicating that there is a high probability will be executed (the pending icon will change to a display mode indicating that there is a relatively high probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state).

Note that the fact that the hold position movement notice is not executed means that the decoration image G60, the hold icon, and the relevant icon are displayed in the normal position, and the fact that the first hold position movement notice is executed means that the decoration image G60 , and the hold icon and the relevant icon are displayed at the first special position.The fact that the second hold position movement notice is executed means that the decoration image G60 and the hold icon and the relevant icon are displayed at the second special position. This means that it will be displayed. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the suspension change notice will be executed in the order of the decoration image G60, the suspension icon, and the display position of the icon in the order of normal position < first special position < second special position. In addition, the decoration image G60, the pending icon, and the display position of the icon are in the order of normal position < 1st special position < 2nd special position, which suggests that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state. This means that there is a high possibility that the pending change notice will be executed (the pending icon will change to a display mode indicating that there is a relatively high possibility of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state).

In addition, in step S4302, if the production control microcomputer 121 first determines that the special symbol variation is not currently being displayed, it performs a reservation change notice determination without performing a reservation position movement notice determination. In this case, the performance control microcomputer 121 issues a pending change notice in the same manner as when the determination result in the pending position movement notice determination is "not to be performed."

If the result of the pending change notice determination is the "first special mode", "second special mode", or "third special mode", in other words, the production control microcomputer 121 issues a pending change notice with a pending change notice. When it is determined to execute, a command (pending change notice command) indicating the determination result (special mode type) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the reservation change notice command in the output buffer in association with the reservation performance command related to the reservation icon corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that is the target of the reservation change notice determination.

In addition, in the following, when "1st special aspect", "2nd special aspect", or "3rd special aspect" is selected in the reservation change advance notice determination, special drawing 1 reservation is the subject of the relevant determination. is referred to as "suspension subject to pending change notice." That is, the pending change notice target reservation is the target of the pending change notice, and the pending change notice is positioned as an effect for the jackpot determination and special figure 1 variation display related to the pending change notice target reservation.

In addition, when the result of the pending change notice determination is "first special mode", "second special mode", or "third special mode", the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the timing ( A hold change timing judgment is performed to determine the hold change timing (hold change timing). The suspension change timing determination is executed with reference to the suspension change timing determination table. FIG. 66 shows an example of the structure of the hold change timing determination table.

As shown in FIG. 66, the reservation change timing determination table is associated with the reservation order when the reservation change notification target reservation occurs. Specifically, the reservation change timing determination table includes a reservation change timing determination table for reservation order 4, a reservation change timing determination table for reservation order 3, a reservation change timing determination table for reservation order 2, and a reservation change timing determination table for reservation order 1. A pending change timing determination table is provided.

In each suspension change timing determination table, "reservation order 3", "reservation order 2", "reservation order 1", and "the change" are set as determination results. "Holding order 3" as a determination result represents the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed since the icon related to the hold that is subject to the pending change notice (icon subject to the pending change notice) is shifted (moved) to the third area 50d3, and the "holding order 3" 2" represents the timing when 2 seconds have passed since the pending change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the second area 50d2, and "Pending order 1" indicates the timing when the pending change notice target icon shifted to the first area 50d1. (movement), and "the change" represents the timing when two seconds have passed since the pending change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the display area 50de. Each suspension change timing determination table shown in FIG. 66 is set as appropriate so that the selection rate for each determination result (reservation order 3, reservation order 2, reservation order 1, and the change) becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 66. It is configured.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 completes the reservation change timing determination, it sets a command (retention change timing command) indicating the determination result (retention change timing) in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. It is assumed that the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a pending change timing command in the output buffer in association with a pending change notice command related to a pending change notice that is subject to pending change timing determination.

The pending production command, pending position movement notice command, pending change notice command, and pending change timing command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 are transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004). In addition, the hold effect command, hold position movement notice command, hold change notice command, and hold change timing command are set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 in the same step S4302 by the above-mentioned series of processes, and basically They will be sent all at once to the image control board 140, but strictly speaking, the effect control microcomputer 121 first sends the hold effect command, then sends the hold position movement notice command, and then sends the hold change notice command. The notice command and the pending change timing command shall be transmitted in this order.

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the hold effect command, it immediately moves the hold display area 50d to a position (first area 50d1, A hold icon in the normal mode is displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4.

In addition, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a hold position movement notice command, when one second has elapsed since displaying the hold icon corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice, Executes the pending position movement notice of the type indicated by the command.

Furthermore, when the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a pending change notice command, the pending change notice command changes the pending icon in the normal mode related to the pending effect command associated with the pending change notice command. At the timing indicated by the associated pending change timing command, the change is made to the special mode indicated by the pending change notice command.

Next, specific examples of a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice will be explained. FIGS. 67 to 69 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice.

In addition, in explaining a specific example of the pending position movement notice and the pending change notice, as shown in FIG. While the variable display of EZ1 to EZ3 is being performed, the corresponding icon HA0 in the normal mode corresponding to the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the holding icon HA1 in the normal mode corresponding to the special figure 1 holding in the holding order 1 are displayed. Assume the situation is as shown.

Further, in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), it is assumed that there is no plan to execute a reservation position movement notice or a reservation change notice. Further, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern related to the icon HA0 is a no-reach loss, and the special figure variation pattern related to the pending icon HA1 is a no-reach loss.

For example, from the situation shown in FIG. 67(A), a special figure 1 reservation occurs in the order of reservation 2, and the look-ahead determination result regarding the special figure 1 reservation is SP jackpot fluctuation, and the special figure 1 reservation occurs. It is assumed that the holding position movement notice judgment based on the above judgment determines that it is "second holding position movement notice", the holding change notice judgment determines that it is "second special mode", and the holding change timing judgment determines that it is "holding order 1". . In other words, the special map 1 reservation becomes the reservation subject to the reservation position movement advance notice. Then, first of all, in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 reservation of the reservation order 2, the reservation icon HA2 in the normal mode is displayed at the position corresponding to the reservation order 2, as shown in FIG. 67(B).

Then, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the hold icon HA2 corresponding to the hold position movement notice target hold is displayed, the decoration image G60 moves to the second special position and the second The pending position movement notice is executed. Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation display that was being performed in the situation shown in FIG. 67(A) ends, and the special figure 1 stop display is displayed in a manner indicating a no-reach loss as shown in FIG. 67(D). When this is performed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been displayed in a variable manner until then are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a no-reach loss, and the icon HA0 is erased.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1 starts, as shown in FIG. The icon HA2 moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the icon HA1, and the hold icon HA2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown) and becomes the hold icon HA2 representing the hold order 1.

Here, since the result of the reservation change timing judgment based on the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon HA2 was "reservation order 1", it is 2 seconds after the reservation order of the special figure 1 reservation becomes reservation order 1. When , the display mode of the hold icon HA2 changes from the normal mode to the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 68(B). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation display that was being performed in the situation shown in Figure 68(A) ends, and the stop display of special figure 1 is performed in a manner that indicates a loss, as shown in Figure 68(C). When the game is played, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which have been displayed in a variable manner, are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that there is no reach and the icon HA1 is erased.

Subsequently, when the special figure 1 variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1 starts, as shown in FIG. It moves to the display area 50e (not shown) and becomes the icon HA2.

After that, since the look-ahead determination result of the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon HA2 was "SP jackpot fluctuation", for example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), a normal fluctuation is performed, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), when the reach is established, the first holding position movement notice ends. Specifically, the decorative image G60 returns to the normal position after the reach is established and until the N reach starts, as shown in FIG. 69(C).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY2, in the display section 50a, the pending icon and the icon (specific image) are displayed at the first special position (first display position) and when the hold icon is displayed at the second special position (first display position). 2 display position) and when the pending icon or the icon (specific image) is displayed at the 2nd special position (2nd display position) than when it is displayed at the 1st special position (1st display position). Since there is a higher possibility of a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) when the icon is displayed in Interest improves. In addition, there is a normal position (normal display position) as the display position of the hold icon or the icon (specific image), and the hold icon or the icon (specific image) is displayed at the normal position (normal display position). Sometimes, the pending icon or the icon (specific image) may be moved to the first special position (first display position) and the second special position (second display position). Since the effects used can be prevented from becoming monotonous, the game's interest is further improved. Furthermore, the objects displayed at the first special position (first display position) and second special position (second display position) will be subject to special figure 1 reservation (jackpot determination, right to execute special figure variable display). Since the icon (pending icon, the icon) may be displayed at the normal position (normal display position) depending on the situation, it is possible to sustain the period for improving the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be explained. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the second embodiment, the pending position movement notice and the pending change notice are executed in the normal gaming state and the normal production mode, but the gaming state and production mode in which the pending position movement notice and the pending change notice can be executed are The present invention is not limited to the two embodiments, and may be modified as appropriate. Further, the reservation position movement notice and the reservation change notice may be made executable in a plurality of types of game states and performance modes. Furthermore, based on the pre-read determination result related to the special drawing 2 reservation, a reservation position movement notice and a reservation change notice may be made executable.

There are two types of hold position movement notice types, in other words, special display positions of the decorative image G60, and in other words, hold icons and special display positions of icons, but the number of types is not particularly limited, and there is only one type. or three or more types.

In addition, there are two types of performance contents for various reservation position movement notices, in other words, the special display position of the decorative image G60, and furthermore, in other words, there are two types of special display positions of the reservation icon and the icon, but the content of this performance is not particularly limited. However, it may be changed as appropriate.

For example, as a first holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is displayed at the left end of the display section 50a in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise with respect to the normal mode. Both or one of the display positions may be changed as appropriate. Similarly, as a preview of the movement of the second holding position, the decorative image G60 is displayed at the right end of the display section 50a in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the normal mode. Both or one of the display positions in 50a may be changed as appropriate.

In both the first reservation position movement notice and the second reservation position movement notice, the decorative image G60, the reservation display area 50d, and the display area 50e are the same size as in the normal mode, but the first Both or one of the reservation position movement notice and the second reservation position movement notice may be enlarged or reduced compared to the normal mode. Alternatively, the decorative image G60, the holding display area 50d, and the display area 50e are enlarged compared to the normal mode in one of the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice, and in the other case, It may be reduced in size compared to the normal mode. Note that when these enlargements and reductions are performed, the sizes of icons such as the relevant icon and the pending icon are naturally enlarged and reduced accordingly.

For example, in the first holding position movement notice, the decoration image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 as a whole, but is maintained in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode, and the left effect pattern EZ1 on the display section 50a is displayed. In the second holding position movement notice, the decoration image G60 is reduced to about 1/3 as a whole, but is maintained in the same horizontal direction as in the normal mode, for example. The right effect pattern EZ3 of the display section 50a may be arranged approximately at the vertical center of the area where it is displayed. Alternatively, in the first holding position movement notice, the decorative image G60 is reduced to about 2/3 as a whole and is held in a state rotated 30 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the normal mode, and the left side of the display section 50a is displayed. The pattern EZ1 is placed near the bottom of the area where it is displayed, and in the second reservation position movement notice, the decoration image G60 is reduced to about 4/5 as a whole and rotated 20 degrees counterclockwise with respect to the normal mode. The left effect pattern EZ1 of the display section 50a may be held at the lower part of the area where the left effect symbol EZ1 is displayed.

Furthermore, when the first holding position movement notice and the second holding position movement notice are executed, the display positions of the holding display area 50d and the display area 50e move integrally, but in this case, the decorative image The design of G60 may be changed or the decorative image G60 may be deleted.

The hold position movement notice is executed when one second has elapsed since the hold icon corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice is displayed, but this execution timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. good. For example, the hold position movement notice may be executed at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice is displayed, or after the hold position related to the hold subject to the hold position move notice has advanced. In other words, the reservation position movement notice may be executed after the reservation icon corresponding to the reservation subject to the reservation position movement notice moves to the display area 50e. Furthermore, a plurality of timings at which the reservation position movement notice can be executed may be set.

In addition, the hold position movement notice ends when a reach is established in the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice, but the end timing of the hold position movement notice is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Also good. For example, the hold position movement notice ends when the special figure variation performance corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice starts, or the hold position moves before the special figure change effect corresponding to the hold subject to the hold position movement notice starts. It may be arranged so that the notice may end. Further, a plurality of timings at which the pending position movement notice ends may be set.

Although there are three types of special aspects, the number of types is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or four or more types. Further, in the second embodiment, the hold icon always appears in a normal mode, but it may appear in a special mode. Furthermore, a pending change notice is a change from a normal mode to a special mode, but a pending change notice changing from a special mode to a normal mode, and/or a pending change notice changing from any special mode to another special mode. may be made executable. In addition, it may be possible to execute a pending change notice in which the display mode changes multiple times from when one pending icon appears until it disappears. In this case, if the decorative image G60 is displayed in the normal position< if the decorative image G60 is displayed in the first special position (the first holding position movement notice has been executed)< if the decorative image G60 is displayed in the second The display mode of the icon corresponding to the reservation subject to reservation position movement notice, or the icon corresponding to another special map 1 reservation, in the order in which it is displayed at the special position (the second reservation position movement notice is executed) The expected value of the number of times that changes may be increased.

Further, in the second embodiment, as the execution timing of the pending change notice, when 2 seconds have passed after the pending change notice target icon is shifted (moved) to the third area 50d3, the pending change notice target icon is moved to the second area. 50d2, when 2 seconds have elapsed since the pending change notice target icon shifted (moved) to the first area 50d1, and when the pending change notice target icon is displayed. Although it is set when 2 seconds have passed after shifting (moving) to the area 50e, the execution timing of the pending change notice can be set as appropriate, and in addition to or in place of all or some of these, the execution timing of the pending change notice can be set as appropriate. , may be set appropriately.

As a look-ahead effect based on the look-ahead determination result related to the special figure 1 hold, a hold position movement notice is executed in which the display position of the decorative image G60, in other words, the hold icon or the icon concerned, moves. The decorative image G60, in other words, the pending icon or the icon may be changed to another image. For example, as a pre-read effect based on the pre-read judgment result regarding special figure 1 suspension, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the display position of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, or another specific image moves. In this case, a plurality of performance types of pre-reading performance may be set depending on the difference in display position. Further, similar to the above-described example of changing the pending position movement notice, when the prefetch effect is executed, the size and posture of the target image may be changed.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the third embodiment will mainly be described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, in the normal game state and the special figure variation performance in the normal performance mode, apart from the performance flow structure performances such as reach and various reach performances, there are also effects that are advantageous to the player. A special mode performance that suggests a possibility of entering a gaming state, in other words, a special mode performance that increases the chance of entering a gaming state advantageous to the player is sometimes executed. The special mode performance can be executed in the normal variation of the special figure variation performance.

Although a specific example will be described later, in the special mode performance, a background image dedicated to the special mode performance (background image for special mode performance) G117 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the special mode effect background image G117 is composed of a 2D animation having a predetermined story. Further, the special mode performance is executed in the normal variation which is the performance flow configuration performance.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a production flow related to special mode production. As shown in FIG. 70, in the special mode performance, first, a special mode performance release notification performance is executed to notify that the special mode performance has started, and then 3, which is the central position of the special mode performance, is executed. A unit performance of three times is executed, then a general performance is executed to summarize the unit performances of three times, and finally, a special mode performance end notification performance is executed to notify that the special mode performance ends.

In each unit performance, a chance-up type suggesting performance that suggests the type of chance-up performance (chance-up type) is first performed, and then a chance-up performance is performed. The chance-up performance is a performance that, when executed, increases the level of expectation for a jackpot game state (increases the chance).

As the chance up type, a first chance up performance, a second chance up performance, and a third chance up performance are set. The first chance-up effect consists of an effect in which a cut-in is performed on the display section 50a (cut-in effect), and the second chance-up effect consists of an effect in which a predetermined group crosses from left to right on the display section 50a (group The third chance-up effect consists of an effect in which the frame lamp 53 emits light in a specific manner (frame lamp flash). Therefore, the chance-up type suggestion performance of the first chance-up performance (first chance-up type suggestion performance) is a performance that suggests that a cut-in performance will be executed, and the chance-up type suggestion performance of the second chance-up performance. (2nd chance up type suggestion performance) is a performance that suggests that a group crossing performance will be executed, and the chance up type suggestion performance (3rd chance up type suggestion performance) of the 3rd chance up performance is a frame lamp This is a production that suggests that a flash will be executed.

Further, three types of performance modes (first chance-up performance modes) are set for the first chance-up performance: a first performance mode A, a first performance mode B, and a first performance mode C. Three types of performance modes (second chance-up performance modes) are also set for the second chance-up performance: second performance mode A, second performance mode B, and second performance mode C. Similarly, for the third chance-up performance, three types of performance modes (third chance-up performance mode) are set: third performance mode A, third performance mode B, and third performance mode C.

The first chance-up presentation mode, the second chance-up presentation mode, and the third chance-up presentation mode are associated with expectations for a jackpot game state suggested by the performance mode. Regarding the first chance up performance mode, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game state will occur in the order of first performance mode A<first performance mode B<first performance mode C. Regarding the second chance up performance mode, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game state will occur in the order of second performance mode A<second performance mode B<second performance mode C. Regarding the third chance up performance mode, there is a high expectation that a jackpot game state will occur in the order of third performance mode A<third performance mode B<third performance mode C.

Note that the type of the first chance-up effect mode is associated with the color of the image (cut-in effect image) G61 used in the cut-in effect. The first presentation mode A is associated with green, the first presentation mode B is associated with red, and the first presentation mode C is associated with gold. The type of the second chance-up effect mode is associated with the number of groups of baseballs forming the image (group-crossing effect image) G62 used in the group-crossing effect. The second presentation mode A is associated with 5 pieces, the second presentation mode B is associated with 15 pieces, and the second presentation mode C is associated with 30 pieces. The type of the third chance-up effect mode is associated with the luminous color of the frame lamp 53 that emits light with the frame lamp flash. The third presentation mode A is associated with green, the third presentation mode B is associated with red, and the third presentation mode C is associated with rainbow colors.

Next, the promotion of chance-up effect will be explained. As mentioned above, the number of times that the chance-up effect can be executed throughout the special mode effect is three times. In any unit performance in any order, there are times when the first chance-up performance is performed, times when the second chance-up performance is performed, and times when the third chance-up performance is performed. Therefore, in the special mode performance, the first chance up performance, the second chance up performance, and the third chance up performance are each performed once, and the first chance up performance is performed twice and the second chance up performance is performed twice. When the up effect is executed once, when the first chance up effect is executed twice, when the third chance up effect is executed once, when the second chance up effect is executed twice and the first chance up effect is executed once. In some cases, the 2nd chance up effect is executed twice and the 3rd chance up effect is executed once, in which case the 3rd chance up effect is executed twice and the 1st chance up effect is executed once. In this case, the third chance up effect is executed twice, the second chance up effect is executed once, the first chance up effect is executed three times, and the second chance up effect is executed three times. There are cases where the third chance up effect is executed three times.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY3, when the same type of chance-up performance is executed multiple times in the special mode performance, the chance-up performance mode is suggested as the order of unit performances increases (the chance-up performance mode The chance-up performance mode may change so that the expectation level for a jackpot game state (corresponding to the corresponding one) increases. In other words, throughout the special mode performance, the chance-up performance mode changes so that the expectation level for a jackpot game state increases. The change in the chance-up performance mode such that the expectation level of reaching this jackpot game state increases is called "promotion of the chance-up performance."

Furthermore, it is executed on the display unit 50a and consists of displaying an image (overall effect image) G64 associated with the overall effect. Three types of presentation modes (overall presentation modes) are set for the overall presentation: a fourth presentation mode A, a fourth presentation mode B, and a fourth presentation mode C. The overall performance mode is associated with the degree of expectation of a jackpot game state suggested by the performance mode. Regarding the overall performance mode, the expectation level is high that the jackpot game state will be achieved in the order of 4th performance mode A < 4th performance mode B < 4th performance mode C.

Although a specific example will be described later, the general effect image G64 is composed of lines of a predetermined female teacher character. The type of overall effect is associated with the content of the lines that constitute the overall effect image G64. The fourth production mode A has the line ``If you can sum it up in one word, it's average.'' The fourth production mode B has the line ``If you can summarize it in one word, it's good.'' The fourth production mode C has the line ``If you can sum it up in one word, it's excellent.'' ”.

Further, in the third embodiment, the performance time of the special mode performance (special mode performance time) is set to 11 seconds. In detail, the performance time of the special mode production start suggestion production is 0.5 seconds, the production time of each unit production is 3 seconds, the production time of the overall production is 1 second, and the special mode production end suggestion production. The presentation time is 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, when a special mode effect is executed, the special mode effect will start when one second has elapsed after the start of the special figure variation effect (normal variation), and the special mode effect will end during the normal variation. do.

Next, an example of the control contents related to the special mode performance will be explained. In addition, since the control contents described below are an example of control contents related to special mode performance, the control contents are not limited to the following contents, and may be changed as appropriate.

For example, in step S4306, if the production control microcomputer 121 is in the normal gaming state and the normal production mode, after determining the special pattern variation production pattern, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines the special pattern variation production pattern based on the special pattern variation start command. A special mode performance execution determination is performed to determine whether execution is possible.

The special mode performance execution determination is executed with reference to the special mode performance execution determination table. An example of the configuration of the special mode performance execution determination table is shown in FIG. 71(A). As shown in FIG. 71(A), the special mode performance execution determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the special mode performance execution determination tables include a special mode performance execution determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a special mode performance execution determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a special mode performance execution determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and L. A special mode performance execution determination table for loss fluctuations, a special mode performance execution determination table for N loss fluctuations, a special mode performance execution determination table for normal A loss fluctuations, a special mode performance execution determination table for normal B loss fluctuations, and A special mode performance execution determination table for normal C loss variation is provided. Each special mode effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 71(A) is configured as appropriate so that the selection rate for executing/not executing the special mode effect becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71(A). There is.

As shown in FIG. 71(A), "Execute" may be selected for both jackpot fluctuations and loss fluctuations. Therefore, when the special mode performance is executed, there is a possibility that a jackpot game state will occur. That is, the special mode performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot game state. In addition, "execute" may be selected in the case of a special figure variation in which a reach is established, but "execute" is not selected in the case of a special figure variation in which a reach is not established. Therefore, when the special mode effect is executed, a reach is always achieved. In other words, the special mode performance is a performance that suggests reaching.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the special mode performance in the special mode performance execution determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 continues to control the performance mode regarding the 3 chance up performance in the special mode performance based on the special figure fluctuation start command. A chance-up scenario determination is performed to determine a scenario (chance-up scenario) that represents the content of the change.

The chance-up scenarios that can be determined in the chance-up scenario determination include scenario 1 (sc1), scenario 2 (sc2), scenario 3 (sc3), scenario 4 (sc4), and scenario 5 (sc5).

In scenario 1, in the first unit performance, a chance-up performance of a certain chance-up type is performed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit performance, a chance-up performance of the same chance-up type is performed. It is executed in mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, a chance-up effect of the same chance-up type is executed in mode C (1C).

In scenario 2, in the first unit performance, a chance-up performance of a certain chance-up type is performed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit performance, a chance-up performance of the same chance-up type is performed. It is executed in mode B (1B), and in the third unit performance, a chance-up effect of another chance-up type is executed in effect mode A (2A).

In scenario 3, in the first unit performance, a chance-up performance of a certain chance-up type is performed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit performance, a chance-up performance of another chance-up type is performed. It is executed in mode A (2A), and in the third unit effect, a chance up effect of the first chance up type is executed in mode B (1B).

In scenario 4, in the first unit performance, a chance-up performance of a certain chance-up type is performed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit performance, a chance-up performance of another chance-up type is performed. It is executed in mode A (2A), and in the third unit effect, a chance up effect of the second chance up type is executed in mode B (2B).

In scenario 5, in the first unit performance, a chance-up performance of a certain chance-up type is performed in production mode A (1A), and in the second unit performance, a chance-up performance of another chance-up type is performed. It is executed in mode A (2A), and in the third unit performance, a chance up performance of a chance up type different from the first or second time is executed in performance mode A (3A).

In this way, in Scenario 1, a type of chance-up production is executed three times, and the production mode is finally changed (promoted) to Production Mode C, and in Scenario 2, Scenario 3, and Scenario 4, the process is mutual. However, the chance-up performance for each type is executed twice, and the performance mode is finally changed (promoted) to performance mode B. In scenario 5, the chance-up performance for each type is executed once, and the performance mode will not change (promote).

The chance up scenario determination is executed with reference to the chance up scenario determination table. An example of the configuration of the chance up scenario determination table is shown in FIG. 71(B). As shown in FIG. 71(B), the chance up scenario determination table is associated with the special symbol fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the chance up scenario determination tables include a chance up scenario determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a chance up scenario determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a chance up scenario determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and a chance up scenario determination table for L loss fluctuations. A chance up scenario determination table and a chance up scenario determination table for N loss variation are provided. Each chance-up scenario determination table shown in FIG. 71(B) is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each chance-up scenario becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 71(B).

As shown in FIG. 71(B), regarding the SP jackpot variation and the L jackpot variation, the selection rate for scenario 1 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 5 is the lowest. Moreover, the ratio of the selection rate of Scenario 1 to the selection rate of Scenario 5 is quite high. In addition, regarding SP loss variation, the selection rate for scenario 1 and scenario 5 are almost the same, and regarding L loss variation, the selection rate for scenario 5 is the highest and the selection rate for scenario 1 is the lowest. . Furthermore, regarding the N loss variation, the selection rate of scenario 1 is "0" and the selection rate of scenario 5 is the highest. Furthermore, regarding the SP jackpot fluctuation and the L jackpot fluctuation, the selection rates of each of Scenarios 2 to 4 are higher than Scenario 5 and lower than Scenario 1. Furthermore, regarding SP loss fluctuations, each of Scenarios 2 to 4 has a higher selection rate than Scenario 1 and Scenario 5. Furthermore, regarding the L loss fluctuation, the selection rates for each of Scenarios 2 to 4 are higher than Scenario 1 and lower than Scenario 5. According to the above and the selection rate shown in FIG. 71(B), when scenario 1 is selected, the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state is highest, and when scenario 5 is selected, the jackpot gaming state is The level of expectation for transition to is the lowest. In other words, when the production mode changes (promotes) to production mode C in the special mode production > When the production mode changes (promotion) to production mode B > The production mode changes (promotion) to production mode B or production mode C ), it can be said that there is a high possibility of a jackpot game state depending on the order in which the players do not play.

After finishing the chance up scenario determination, the production control microcomputer 121 continues to issue a chance up type for determining the chance up types that constitute the chance up scenario based on the special symbol variation start command and the chance up scenario determination result. Perform pattern judgment. The chance up type pattern determination is determined for each chance up scenario.

In scenario 1, the same type of chance-up performance is executed three times, and the performance mode changes (promotes) in the order of "performance mode A → production mode B → production mode C", but the performance control microcomputer 121 , If scenario 1 is determined in the chance up scenario judgment, the chance up type of this target is determined as one of the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, or the third chance up effect in the chance up type pattern judgment. decided on.

In Scenario 2, Scenario 3, and Scenario 4, one type of chance-up effect is executed twice, another type of chance-up effect is executed once, and the effect mode for the two times is ``Production mode A → Production mode. B", but if the production control microcomputer 121 determines Scenario 2 to Scenario 4 in the chance up scenario judgment, the chance up type of these two targets will be changed (promoted) in the chance up type pattern judgment. and the chance-up type of one target are determined to be either a first chance-up performance, a second chance-up performance, or a third chance-up performance.

In scenario 5, all types of chance-up performances are executed once in performance mode A, but when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to be scenario 5 in chance-up scenario determination, chance-up type pattern determination is performed. Decide in what order they will be executed.

The chance up type pattern determination is executed with reference to the chance up type pattern determination table. Examples of the structure of the chance up type pattern determination table are shown in FIGS. 72 and 73. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the chance up type pattern determination table is associated with the special symbol variation pattern and the chance up scenario determination result. Specifically, the chance up type pattern determination table includes a chance up type pattern determination table for SP jackpot fluctuations, a chance up type pattern determination table for L jackpot fluctuations, a chance up type pattern determination table for SP loss fluctuations, and L A chance up type pattern determination table for loss fluctuations and a chance up type pattern determination table for N loss fluctuations are provided. Further, the chance up type pattern determination tables other than those for N loss variation include one for scenario 1, one for scenarios 2 to 4, and one for scenario 5. On the other hand, the chance up type pattern determination table for N loss variation further includes one for scenarios 2 to 4 and one for scenario 5. Each chance up type pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 72 to 73 is configured as appropriate so that the selection rate for each chance up type pattern (type P) becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 72 to 73. ing. In addition, "1st", "2nd", and "3rd" listed in the notes of each chance up type pattern determination table are "1st chance up effect", "2nd chance up effect", and "3rd chance up effect", respectively. It stands for "3rd chance up production".

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, for scenario 1, the third chance performance is most likely to be selected due to jackpot fluctuations, and the third chance up performance is least likely to be selected due to loss fluctuations. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed with the third chance up performance, there is the highest possibility of transition to the jackpot game state. On the contrary, for scenario 1, the first chance performance is the least likely to be selected due to jackpot fluctuations, and the first chance up performance is most likely to be selected due to loss fluctuations. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed with the first chance up performance, the possibility of transition to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest.

Regarding scenario 2, execution of the third chance performance twice is most likely to be selected due to jackpot fluctuations, and execution of the third chance up performance twice is least likely to be selected due to loss fluctuations. Therefore, the possibility of transition to the jackpot gaming state is highest when scenario 2 is executed twice in the third chance up effect. On the contrary, for scenario 2, execution of the first chance performance twice is the least likely to be selected due to jackpot fluctuations, and execution of the first chance up performance twice is most likely to be selected due to loss fluctuations. Therefore, when scenario 1 is executed twice in the first chance up performance, the possibility of transition to the jackpot gaming state is the lowest.

After completing the chance-up type pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 then performs an overall performance mode determination for determining the overall performance mode based on the chance-up scenario determination result. The overall presentation mode determination is executed with reference to the overall presentation mode determination table. An example of the configuration of the overall performance mode determination table is shown in FIG. 74. As shown in FIG. 74, the overall performance mode determination table is associated with the chance-up scenario. Specifically, as the overall presentation mode determination table, there are provided an overall presentation mode judgment table for scenario 1, an overall presentation mode judgment table for scenarios 2 to 4, and an overall presentation mode judgment table for scenario 5. . Each comprehensive performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 74 is appropriately configured so that the selection rate for each comprehensive performance mode becomes a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 74.

As shown in Figure 74, for Scenario 1, the fourth production mode C "Dialogue: excellent when summarized in one sentence" is selected with a 100% probability, and for Scenarios 2 to 4, the probability is 100%. There is a probability that the fourth production mode B "Dialogue: If you summarize it in one word, it's good" will be selected, and for scenario 5, there is a 100% probability that the fourth production mode A "Dialogue: If you summarize it in one word, it's average." ' will be selected. That is, the overall performance mode is associated with the chance-up scenario.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 completes the overall performance mode determination, it issues a command indicating the chance up scenario determination result (chance up scenario command), a command indicating the chance up type pattern determination result (chance up type pattern command), and A command indicating the overall presentation mode (overall presentation mode command) is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124, and data indicating the chance up scenario judgment result (chance up scenario data) and data indicating the chance up type pattern judgment result (chance up scenario data) are set. (up type pattern data) and data indicating the overall effect mode determination result (overall effect mode data) are set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124.

The chance-up scenario command, chance-up type pattern command, and overall presentation mode command set in the output buffer are transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004). When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the chance up scenario command, the chance up type pattern command, and the general presentation mode command, the image CPU 141 executes the chance up scenario command, the chance up type pattern command, and the general presentation mode command in the special figure variation presentation. A special mode performance is executed according to the content indicated by the performance mode command.

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 executes the special mode performance according to the contents indicated by the chance up scenario data, the chance up type pattern data, and the overall performance mode data.

Next, a specific example of the special mode performance will be explained. FIGS. 75 to 79 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of special mode effects. Note that in FIGS. 75 to 79, the display section 50a and the frame lamp 53 are extracted and schematically shown. Further, here, it is assumed that a unit performance composed of scenario 5 and type P32 is executed. That is, in the first unit performance, the first chance up performance (cut-in performance) of the first performance mode A is executed, and in the second unit performance, the third chance up performance (frame lamp) of the third performance mode A is executed. Flash) is executed, and in the third unit performance, the second chance up performance (group crossing performance) of the second performance mode A is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that the overall performance is executed in the fourth performance mode A.

As shown in FIG. 75(A), when one second has elapsed since the start of the special pattern variation effect, in other words, the variable display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3, the special mode effect starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a special mode effect background image G117 is displayed on the entire display section 50a. When the special mode performance starts, first, a special mode performance start suggestion performance is executed in the special mode performance background image G117. For example, as shown in FIG. 75(B), a predetermined female teacher character appears and the predetermined female teacher character explains the main parts of the special mode production. An image of text that appears to be uttering the line ``Let's start a class on improving your chances,'' indicating that the chance-up production that is composed of the characters is about to begin, is displayed. In the third embodiment, the performance content of the special mode start suggestion performance is set to be the same regardless of the performance content of the subsequent unit performance and overall performance.

In the special mode performance, when the special mode performance start suggestion performance is executed, the first unit performance is then started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(A), as the first chance-up type suggestion effect, it is indicated that the first chance-up effect (cut-in effect) will be executed in the special mode effect background image G117. The phrase "1st period is a cut-in notice" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 76(B), the first effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance-up effect. Cut-in effect image G61 of aspect A is displayed. In addition, when a second chance up effect (group crossing effect) is executed as the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect is performed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the first chance up type suggestion effect. The phrase "The first period is a group preview" is displayed to indicate that the effect (group crossing effect) will be executed, and if the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) is executed, the first chance up will be executed. It is assumed that, as a type-suggesting effect, the phrase ``The first period is a frame flash'' indicating that the third chance-up effect (frame lamp flash) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. . Further, "1st period" included in the phrase related to the first chance-up type suggestion performance corresponds to the order of unit performances "1st time".

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(A), the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) is indicated to be executed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the second chance up type suggestion effect. The phrase "2nd period is a frame flash" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 77(B), the frame lamp 53 emits light in the third effect mode A as a second chance-up effect. , in the special mode effect background image G117, an effect image G63 corresponding to the light emission of the frame lamp 53 in the third effect mode A is displayed. In addition, when the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the second chance up effect, the first chance up effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the second chance up type suggestion effect. The phrase "2nd period is a cut-in notice" is displayed to indicate that the production (cut-in production) will be executed, and if the second chance up production (cross-group production) is executed, the second chance will be given. As an up type suggestion effect, the phrase "2nd period is a group preview" indicating that a second chance up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed was displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. do. Further, "2nd period" included in the phrase related to the second chance-up type suggestion performance corresponds to the unit performance order "second time".

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78(A), as a third chance up type suggestion performance, it is indicated that a second chance up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed in the special mode performance background image G117. The phrase "3rd period is a group preview" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a second performance mode is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as a third chance up performance. The group crossing effect image G62 of A is displayed. In addition, when the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) is executed as the third chance up effect, the first chance up effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the third chance up type suggestion effect. If the phrase "3rd period is a cut-in notice" is displayed indicating that the production (cut-in production) will be executed, and if the 3rd chance up production (frame lamp flash) is executed, the third chance will be announced. As an up type suggestion effect, the phrase "3rd period is a frame flash" indicating that the third chance up effect (frame lamp flash) will be executed is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117. do. Moreover, "3rd period" included in the phrase related to the third chance up type suggestion performance corresponds to the unit performance order "3rd time".

When the third unit performance ends, the overall performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode performance background image G117 as a general performance, and a general performance image G64 of the fourth performance mode A is displayed. be done. In addition, here, if the overall effect is executed in the fourth effect mode B, the display content of the overall effect image G64 will be changed to the characters "To sum up in one word: Good" representing the lines associated with the fourth effect mode B. If the overall effect is executed in the fourth effect mode C, the display content of the overall effect image G64 will be the characters ``Summing up in one word'' representing the lines associated with the fourth effect mode C. It's excellent.''

Then, as shown in FIG. 79(B), as shown in FIG. 79(C),

Next, a specific example of the special mode performance will be described in the case where the unit performance consisting of scenario 3 and type P22 is executed and the overall performance of the fourth performance mode B is executed. That is, in the first unit performance, the first chance up performance (cut-in performance) of the first performance mode A is executed, and in the second unit performance, the third chance up performance (frame lamp) of the third performance mode A is executed. Flash) is performed, and in the third unit performance, the first chance up performance (cut-in performance) of the first performance mode B is performed. Note that the performance contents of the special mode performance start suggestion performance, the first unit performance, and the second unit performance are the same as in the previous specific example (FIGS. 75 to 77), so illustrations thereof are omitted here.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the first chance up effect (cut-in effect) is executed in the special mode effect background image G117 as the third chance up type suggestion effect. The phrase "3rd period is a cut-in notice" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 80(B), the first effect is displayed in the special mode effect background image G117 as a third chance-up effect. Cut-in effect image G61 of aspect B is displayed.

When the third unit performance ends, the overall performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode performance background image G117 as a general performance, and a general performance image G64 of the fourth performance mode B is displayed. be done. When the overall performance is completed, similarly to the previous specific example, the special mode performance end suggestion performance is executed, and then the special mode performance ends (FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C)).

Next, a specific example of the special mode performance will be described when the unit performance consisting of scenario 1 and type P13 is executed and the overall performance of the fourth performance mode C is executed. That is, in the first unit performance, the second chance-up performance (cross-group performance) of the second performance mode A is executed, and in the second unit performance, the second chance-up performance (cross-group performance) of the second performance mode B is executed. Performance) is executed, and in the third unit performance, a second chance-up performance (group crossing performance) of the second performance mode C is performed. Note that the presentation contents of the special mode presentation start suggestion presentation are the same as those in the previous specific example (FIG. 75), so illustration thereof will be omitted here.

When the special mode performance start suggestion performance ends, next, the first unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(A), as the first chance up type suggestion performance, it is indicated that the second chance up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed in the special mode performance background image G117. The phrase "1st period is a group preview" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(B), a second performance mode is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as a first chance up performance. The group crossing effect image G62 of A is displayed.

When the first unit performance ends, the second unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(C), as a second chance-up type suggestion effect, the background image G117 for special mode effect indicates that a second chance-up effect (group crossing effect) will be executed. The phrase "2nd period is a group preview" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(D), a second performance mode is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as a second chance-up performance. The group crossing effect image G62 of B is displayed.

When the second unit performance ends, the third unit performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(E), as a third chance up type suggestion performance, it is indicated that a second chance up performance (group crossing performance) will be executed in the special mode performance background image G117. The phrase "3rd period is a group preview" is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 81(F), the second performance mode is displayed in the special mode performance background image G117 as a third chance up performance. The group crossing effect image G62 of C is displayed.

When the third unit performance ends, the overall performance starts. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81(G), a predetermined female teacher character appears in the special mode performance background image G117 as a general performance, and a general performance image G64 of the fourth performance mode C is displayed. be done. When the overall performance is completed, the special mode performance end suggestion performance is executed as in the previous specific example, and then the special mode performance ends (FIGS. 79(B) to 79(C)).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3, a special mode performance (specific performance) that suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be executed. It is possible to perform multiple types of specific effects (cut-in effects, cross-group effects, frame lamp flashes: unit effects) three times (N times) consecutively, and the same type of specific effects (cut-in effects) can be executed three times (N times). , group crossing effect, frame lamp flash: unit effect) is executed 3 times (N times) than when executed 2 times (N-1 times), the jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) Since there is a high possibility that this will occur, it is possible to draw attention to the number of executions of each type of specific performance (unit performance) and to add sharpness to the special mode performance (specific performance), thereby improving game interest. In addition, specific performances (unit performances) include a first specific performance (cut-in performance: first unit performance) and a second specific performance (group crossing performance: second unit performance), and a special mode performance (specific performance). ), the first specific performance (first unit performance), or Pay attention to the type of specific performance (unit performance) because there is a higher possibility of a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) when only one of the second specific performances (second unit performance) is executed alone. At the same time, it is possible to add sharpness to the special mode performance (specific performance), further improving the interest in the game. Furthermore, the specific effects (unit effects) include a first specific effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) and a second specific effect (group cross-effect effect: second unit effect), and a special mode effect (specific effect). ), the second specific effect (group cross-effect: second unit effect) is executed three times (N times) than when the first specific effect (cut-in effect: first unit effect) is executed three times (N times). Since there is a higher possibility of a jackpot gaming state (advantageous gaming state) if the game is executed (times), it is possible to draw attention to the type of specific performance (unit performance), which further improves gaming interest. .

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

In the third embodiment, the special mode performance is executed in the normal game state and normal performance mode, but the game state and performance mode in which the special mode performance can be executed are not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. good. Further, the special mode performance may be made possible to be performed in a plurality of types of game states and performance modes. Furthermore, a special mode performance may be made executable in the special pattern variation performance related to the special pattern 2 variation pattern.

The special mode performance is started when one second has elapsed since the start of the special figure variation performance, but the execution timing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, a plurality of timings at which the special mode effect can be executed may be set. Furthermore, the performance time of the special mode performance may be changed as appropriate.

Although there are three types of chance-up effects, the number of types is not particularly limited and may be two or four or more types. Further, although there are three types of presentation modes for each chance-up presentation, the number of presentation modes is not particularly limited and may be two or four or more. Furthermore, the number of performance modes may be made to differ depending on the chance-up performance type.

In one special mode performance, the unit performance is executed three times, but the number of executions is not particularly limited and may be two, four or more times. Further, for example, the number of executions of the unit performance in one special mode performance may be selectable from a plurality of numbers. In this case, as the number of executions increases, the possibility of promotion to a production mode with a high expectation of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state and/or the expectation of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state may increase.

Although the presentation mode of the overall performance is associated with the chance-up scenario, it is not completely associated with the chance-up scenario, and any overall presentation mode may be determined for each chance-up scenario. You can leave it as is. However, for example, in the case of scenario 1, the selection rate is higher in the order of 4th presentation mode C>4th presentation mode B>4th presentation mode A, and in the case of scenario 5, the selection rate is higher in the order of 4th presentation mode A>4th presentation mode There may be a relationship between the selection rate of the overall performance mode and the chance-up scenario, such as the selection rate becoming higher in the order of mode B>fourth performance mode C. In addition, in the special mode performance, there are times when the overall performance is executed and times when the overall performance is not executed, and it may be configured such that the possibility of a jackpot game state is higher when the overall performance is executed. . Furthermore, the special mode performance may be configured such that the overall performance is not executed.

In the special mode production, when each chance-up production mode is promoted, it is promoted one step at a time, such as from production mode A to production mode B, and from production mode B to production mode C, but it is promoted by multiple stages, such as from production mode A to production mode C. It may be possible to do so. Furthermore, when the chance-up production type is executed for the first time in the special mode production, it is executed in production mode A, but it may be executed in production mode B or production mode C. .

The type of the first chance-up effect mode is associated with the color of the cut-in effect image G61, the type of the second chance-up effect mode is associated with the number of baseballs constituting the cross-group effect image G62, Although the types of chance-up production modes are associated with the luminous colors of the frame lamps 53, the elements constituting the production associated with the types of each production mode may be changed as appropriate.

The first chance up performance (cut-in performance), second chance up performance (group crossing performance), and third chance up performance (frame lamp flash) that make up the special mode performance are different from the special mode performance. It may be configured so that it may be executed.

Furthermore, the first chance-up performance mode, the second chance-up performance mode, and the third chance-up performance mode suggest the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot game state, but the content of the suggestion is limited to the degree of expectation of becoming a jackpot game state. It may be changed as appropriate. For example, all or part of the first chance-up performance mode, the second chance-up performance mode, and the third chance-up performance mode are specific effects such as a performance that suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot game state. The degree of expectation that a specific jackpot game will be executed that can relatively obtain a large number of game balls, or the game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a high probability state or a time saving state after the jackpot game state. It may also be possible to suggest the degree of expectation that will be achieved.

Furthermore, in the above example, the first chance-up effect is composed of a cut-in effect, the second chance-up effect is composed of a cross-group effect, and the third chance-up effect is composed of a frame lamp flash. The content of the chance-up performance is not limited to these and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance-up effect may be configured by a change in the display mode of the pending icon or a change in the display mode of the icon. In this case, after the chance up type suggestion performance is executed, the pending icon or the display mode of the icon may be changed as the chance up performance. Furthermore, when the chance-up effect is performed on the display section 50a, the element of the effect to which the chance-up effect mode is associated is not limited to the color, but may be changed as appropriate. For example, the chance-up effect mode may be associated with the size of the image, the display position of the image, or the type (shape) of the character represented by the image. Furthermore, the chance-up performance may be configured by operating the movable board 55k. In this case, the chance-up production mode may be associated with the movement distance or operation mode of the board movable body 55k. Alternatively, the chance-up effect may be configured by outputting sound from the speaker 52. In this case, the chance-up effect mode may be associated with the volume or the type of sound.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the fourth embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment includes a cross button 40k in addition to the first performance button 41k and the second performance button 42k as operation means that can be operated by the player. FIG. 82 is a partially enlarged plan view of the vicinity of the upper plate 34. As shown in FIG. 82, the cross button 40k is provided near the left side of the first effect button 41k on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured to be pressable like the first effect button 41k.

The cross button 40k is formed into a substantially "10" shape, and is divided into upper, lower, left and right parts, with an upper operation part 40ku located on the upper side, a lower operation part 40kd located on the lower side, and a lower operation part 40kd located on the right side. It has a right operating section 40kr and a left operating section 40kl located on the left side, and is configured such that each of the operating sections 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, and 40kl constituting the cross button 40k can be independently pressed. In addition, in the following, the upper operation part 40ku and lower operation part 40kd of the cross button 40k are collectively referred to as "up and down buttons 40k1", and the right operation part 40kr and left operation part 40kl of the cross button 40k are collectively referred to as "left and right". button 40k2".

Further, the cross button 40k is connected to a cross button sensor 40a that detects an operation on the cross button 40k. The cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a are integrally configured, and the cross button 40k and the cross button sensor 40a are collectively referred to as a "cross button device 40."

Next, the electrical configuration on the production control board 120 side in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the production control board 120 side in the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the cross button sensor 40a is connected to the performance control board 120, similar to the first performance button sensor 41a and the second performance button sensor 42a. The cross button sensor 40a detects which part of the cross button 40k, specifically, which of the upper operation section 40ku, the lower operation section 40kd, the right operation section 40kr, and the left operation section 40kl is pressed. Is possible. In other words, the cross button sensor 40a includes an upper operation section sensor 40au that detects an operation on the upper operation section 40ku, a lower operation section sensor 40ad that detects an operation on the lower operation section 40kd, and an operation on the right operation section 40kr. It has a right operation section sensor 40ar that detects an operation on the left operation section 40kl, and a left operation section sensor 40al that detects an operation on the left operation section 40kl.

When each operating section sensor 40au, 40ad, 40ar, 40al detects an operation on each operating section 40ku, 40kd, 40kr, 40kl, a signal (upper operating section A detection signal, a lower operation section detection signal, a right operation section detection signal, a left operation section detection signal) are output to the production control board 120. In addition, below, the upper operation part sensor 40au of the cross button sensor 40a and the lower operation part sensor 40ad are collectively referred to as "up and down button sensors 40a1", and the right operation part sensor 40ar and the left operation part sensor of the cross button sensor 40k are collectively referred to as "up and down button sensors 40a1". 40al are collectively referred to as "left and right button sensors 40a2."

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the pachinko game machine PY4 is configured such that specific matters regarding the performance can be arbitrarily set (customized) by the player. In the pachinko game machine PY4, there are five specific items regarding customizable effects: premium up mode, one-shot notification, auto button, 3D, and pre-read chance. In the following, these specific items regarding customizable effects may be referred to as "effect specific items." In addition, "Premier Up Mode", "One-shot Announcement", "Auto Button", "3D", and "Pre-Reading Chance" are respectively referred to as "First Production Specific Items", "Second Production Specific Items", and " They may also be referred to as "third performance specific matter", "fourth performance specific matter", and "fifth performance specific matter". Note that the ability for the player to arbitrarily set each effect specific item is sometimes referred to as a "custom function."

Setting and control of performance specific items are mainly performed by the performance control microcomputer 121. For this purpose, the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 is provided with a performance specific matter storage section 128 that stores information regarding performance specific matters. The performance specific matter storage unit 128 includes a first specific matter storage unit 128a that stores information regarding the first performance specific matter, a second specific matter storage unit 128b that stores information regarding the second performance specific matter, and a third specific matter storage unit 128b that stores information regarding the second performance specific matter. A third specific matter storage unit 128c that stores information regarding production specific matters, a fourth specific matter storage unit 128d that stores information regarding fourth performance specific matters, and a fifth specific matter storage unit that stores information regarding fifth production specific matters. It has a storage section 128e.

Next, the custom functions of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 will be explained.

The "premier up mode" constituting the first performance specific matter is a mode in which the appearance frequency of premium performances executable in the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is increased. Here, we will omit a specific explanation of the premiere performances, but among the performances that can be executed on the pachinko gaming machine PY4, there are multiple types of premiere performances that suggest that there is a high possibility of a jackpot game state. It is assumed that there is Basically, in other words, as a default state, the appearance rate of premium effects in pachinko gaming machine PY4 is set to be extremely low (for example, less than 5%), and the custom function is set to turn on (enable) premium up mode. ), it is possible to improve the appearance rate of premiere performances.

The "one-shot announcement" that constitutes the second performance specific matter can be executed in the middle of the special figure fluctuation performance when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, and is used to announce a jackpot such as the so-called "P hula". It's about the performance. A specific explanation of the one-shot announcement will be omitted here, but basically, in other words, the default state is set so that the one-shot announcement may be executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY4. However, by turning off (invalidating) the one-shot notification using the custom function, it is possible to prevent the one-shot notification from being executed.

The "auto button" that constitutes the third effect specific item is an operation promotion effect for various operation contents such as normal single-press operation, continuous press, and long press on the first effect button 41k and second effect button 42k. A mode in which an operation result effect is executed even though the operation means (first effect button 41k, second effect button 42k) that is the target of the operation promotion effect is not operated during execution. It is. A detailed explanation of the auto button will be omitted here, but basically, in other words, the auto button is not set in the default state, but the auto button is set to ON (enabled) using the custom function. By doing so, when the operation promotion effect is being executed, it is possible to cause the operation result effect to be executed without using the first effect button 41k or the second effect button 42k to perform the operation indicated by the operation promotion effect. can.

"3D", which constitutes the fourth performance optional setting item, is a mode in which 3D images can be viewed with the naked eye. Although detailed description of the image display device 50 will be omitted here, it is assumed that the image display device 50 according to the fourth embodiment is configured with a liquid crystal monitor compatible with autostereoscopic 3D viewing. Although a description of a specific production example using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic viewing will be omitted, basically, in other words, 3D is set as the default state, and the SP reach background image G115, the L reach background image Where the image G114 and specific preview effects are displayed in naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, by setting 3D to OFF (invalidation) using the custom function, the SP reach background image G115, the L reach background image G114, and Specific preview effects can be displayed in 2D.

The "pre-reading chance" that constitutes the fifth effect arbitrary setting item is a preview effect that is executed based on the pre-reading determination. Although a specific explanation of the pre-read chance will be omitted here, basically, in other words, in the default state, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is set so that the pre-read chance may be executed. By setting the pre-reading chance to OFF (invalidation) using the custom function, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading chance from being executed.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 is configured such that the player can arbitrarily set the first performance specific matter to the fifth performance specific matter. For example, when the RAM clear switch 192 is operated, the so-called "RAM clear" is performed. In the default state after this has been performed, the premier up mode is set to OFF as the first performance specific item, the one-shot notification is set to ON as the second performance specific item, and the auto button is set to OFF as the third performance specific item. 3D is set to ON as a fourth effect specific item, and a look-ahead chance is set to ON as a fifth effect specific item. In addition, for these default conditions, the first performance specific item is that Premier Up Mode is set to ON, the second performance specific item is that one-shot notification is set to OFF, and the third performance specific item is that The auto button is set to ON, the 3D is set to OFF as the fourth effect specific item, and the look-ahead chance is set to OFF as the fifth effect specific item, respectively, as "customized state". to be called. Further, if any one of the first to fifth performance specific items is in the customized state, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 as a whole is also in the customized state.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 turns off the flag (premier up mode flag) indicating that the premium up mode is set to ON in the first specific item storage section 128a as a default state related to various production specific items. , the flag (one-shot notification prohibition flag) indicating that one-shot notification is set to OFF (prohibition of one-shot notification) is turned off in the second specific item storage unit 128b, and in the third specific item storage unit 128c, The flag (auto button flag) indicating that the auto button is set to ON is turned OFF, and the flag (3D prohibition flag) indicating that 3D is set to OFF (prohibition of 3D) is set in the fourth specific item storage unit 128d. ) is turned OFF, and a flag (pre-reading prohibition flag) indicating that the pre-reading chance is set to OFF (pre-reading chance prohibited) is turned OFF in the fifth specific item storage unit 128e. Therefore, in the customized state, the production control microcomputer 121 turns on the premium up mode flag in the first specific item storage unit 128a, turns on the one-shot notification prohibition flag in the second specific item storage unit 128b, and turns on the one-shot notification prohibition flag in the second specific item storage unit 128b. In the third specific item storage unit 128c, the auto button flag is turned on, in the fourth specific item storage unit 128d, the 3D prohibition flag is turned on, and in the fifth specific item storage unit 128e, the prefetch prohibition flag is turned on. Become.

Next, operations related to custom functions in the pachinko gaming machine PY4 will be explained. As operations related to the custom function, there are a non-game custom operation that can be executed when no game is being played, and an in-game custom operation that can be executed while a game is being played. Custom operations during non-gaming can be performed using the cross button 40k and first effect button 41k, and custom operations during a game can be performed using the cross button 40k.

Note that the display on the display unit 50a regarding the custom function will be explained below, but when the cross button 40k or the first effect button 41k is operated as an operation related to the custom function, various detection signals (upper operation unit detection signal, lower operation section detection signal, right operation section detection signal, left operation section detection signal, first production button detection signal) are input to the production control board 120. When the production control microcomputer 121 receives various detection signals, it immediately transmits a command indicating the detection signal to the image control board 140. Then, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140, based on the command indicating the detection signal, in other words, in response to the operation of the cross button 40k or the first performance button 41k via the performance control board 120, It is assumed that cursors G76, G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, G75c, and G83, which will be described later, are moved as appropriate as shown.

First, custom operations during non-gaming will be explained. FIGS. 84 to 87 are explanatory diagrams illustrating custom operations during non-gaming. In the pachinko gaming machine PY4, for example, in a state in which special figure variable display and jackpot games are not being played (customer waiting state), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed on the entire display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 84(A). When the first performance button 41k is operated while is displayed, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs custom operations during non-gaming or changes the volume and light intensity, as shown in FIG. 84(B). The screen changes to a screen (setting selection screen) where an operation can be selected.

On the setting selection screen, the background image (first normal background image G111 in FIG. 84(B)) related to the game that was displayed immediately before entering the customer waiting state is displayed on the entire display section 50a, and the The effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 ("9, 3, 5" in FIG. 84 (B)) that were stopped and displayed immediately before entering the customer waiting state are displayed superimposed on the background image, and the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a superimposed manner. Superimposed on EZ3, an image (screen transition explanation image) G70 is displayed that explains how to transition to a screen related to custom operations during non-gaming and a screen related to operations for changing volume and light intensity.

In the screen transition explanation image G70, a figure in which the up and down buttons 40k1 are highlighted in the cross button 40k is displayed, and an explanatory text "Move to the menu screen" is displayed to the right of the figure, and a cross is displayed on the right side of the figure. A figure in which the left and right buttons 40k2 are highlighted among the buttons 40k is displayed, and an explanatory text "You can change the volume and light intensity" is displayed to the right of the figure. In the screen transition explanation image G70, when the up and down buttons 40k1 are operated, the screen changes to a screen related to custom operations during non-gaming (custom operation screen during non-gaming), and when the left and right buttons 40k2 are operated, the screen is related to operations for changing the volume and light intensity. It explains the transition on the screen.

Therefore, when the up and down buttons 40k1 are operated while the screen transition explanation image G70 is displayed, the effect control microcomputer 121 switches from the setting selection screen to the non-gaming custom operation screen. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 on the display unit 50a.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a custom operation screen during non-gaming. The non-gaming custom operation screen G102 includes an area (first performance specific area) G71 for operating custom functions related to the first performance specific matter (premier up mode), and a second performance specific matter (one-shot notification). ) area for operating custom functions related to (second performance specific matter area) G72, area for operating custom functions related to third performance specific matters (auto button) (third performance specific matter area) G73, area for operating custom functions related to the 4th performance optional settings (3D) (4th performance specific item area) G74, and operation of custom functions related to the 5th performance optional settings (pre-reading chance) An area (fifth performance specific area) G75 for performing is formed in substantially the same horizontally long rectangular shape. In the fourth embodiment, in approximately the upper half of the non-gaming custom operation screen G102, a first performance specific matter area G71, a second performance specific matter area G72, a third performance specific matter area G73, and a fourth performance specific matter area G74. , and the fifth performance specific matter area G75 are arranged side by side in an adjacent state from top to bottom.

Inside each of the various production specific matter areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, the names representing the production specific matters (Premium Up Mode, One-shot Announcement, Auto Button, 3D, Look-ahead Chance) are displayed aligned to the left. has been done. In addition, inside each of the various production specific matter areas G71, G72, G73, G74, and G75, there are default selection sections G71a, G72a, G73a, which indicate that the default state is selected for each production specific matter. G74a, G75a, and customization selection portions G71b, G72b, G73b, G74b, and G75b indicating that the customization state is selected are formed.

A first default selection section G71a is formed in the first performance specific matter area G71, which indicates that the first performance specific matter is in a default state (premium up mode is set to OFF). Further, on the right side of the first default selection section G71a, a first customization selection section G71b is formed which indicates that the first performance specific item is in a customized state (premier up mode is set to ON).

A second default selection section G72a is formed in the second performance specific matter area G72, which indicates that the second performance specific matter is in a default state (one-shot notification is set to ON). Further, on the right side of the second default selection section G72a, a second customization selection section G72b is formed which indicates that the second effect specific item is in a customized state (one-shot notification is set to OFF).

A third default selection section G73a is formed in the third performance specific matter area G73, which indicates that the third performance specific matter is in a default state (the auto button is set to OFF). Further, on the right side of the third default selection section G73a, a third customization selection section G73b is formed, which indicates that the third effect specific item is in a customized state (the auto button is set to ON).

A fourth default selection section G74a is formed in the fourth performance specific matter area G74, which indicates that the fourth performance specific matter is in a default state (3D is set to ON). Further, on the right side of the fourth default selection section G74a, a fourth customization selection section G74b is formed to indicate that the fourth effect specific item is in a customized state (3D is set to OFF).

A fifth default selection section G75a is formed in the fifth effect specific matter area G75, which indicates that the fifth effect specific matter is in a default state (pre-reading chance is set to ON). Further, on the right side of the fifth default selection section G75a, a fifth customization selection section G75b is formed, which indicates that the fifth effect specific item is in a customized state (prefetch chance is set to OFF).

In the fourth embodiment, the first default selection section G71a, the first customization selection section G71b, the second default selection section G72a, the second customization selection section G72b, the third default selection section G73a, the third customization selection section G73b, The fourth default selection section G74a, the fourth customization selection section G74b, the fifth default selection section G75a, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are formed into substantially the same horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the first default selection section G71a, the second default selection section G72a, the third default selection section G73a, the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth default selection section G75a are arranged vertically (aligned in the horizontal direction). The first customization selection section G71b, the second customization selection section G72b, the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth customization selection section G74b, and the fifth customization selection section G75b are displayed vertically (left and right). (aligned in the direction).

In addition, inside each of the first performance specific matter area G71, the second performance specific matter area G72, the third performance specific matter area G73, the fourth performance specific matter area G74, and the fifth performance specific matter area G75, there is a selection area. Sub-cursors G71c, G72c, G73c, G74c, and G75c are displayed to indicate the state (default state/customized state) related to each performance specific item being displayed. The sub-cursors G71c to G75c associated with each of the effect specific matter areas G71 to G75 are formed of frame-shaped figures that exactly overlap the outer circumferential lines of the default selection sections G71a to G75a and the customization selection sections G71b to G75b.

Note that when the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming when each performance specific matter is completely in the default state for the entire pachinko gaming machine PY4, as shown in FIG. 85, each performance specific matter area G71 to G75 is It is assumed that the sub-cursors G71c to G75c select the default selection sections G71a to G75a. Specifically, when the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the sub-cursor (first sub-cursor) G71c related to the first performance specific item is displayed overlapping the first default selection section G71a, and The sub cursor (second sub cursor) G72c related to the second effect specific item is displayed exactly overlapping the second default selection area G72a, and the sub cursor (third sub cursor) G73c related to the third effect specific item is displayed exactly over the second default selection area G72a. A sub cursor (fourth sub cursor) G74c, which is displayed overlapping the third default selection section G73a and is related to the fourth effect specific matter, is displayed exactly overlapping the fourth default selection section G74a, and is a sub cursor related to the fifth effect specific matter. The cursor (fifth sub-cursor) G75c is displayed exactly overlapping the fifth default selection section G75a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY4, by operating the left and right buttons 40k2, it is possible to individually move each sub-cursor G71c to G75c between each default selection section G71a to G75a and each customization selection section G71b to G75b. That is, it is possible to individually change each performance specific item between the default state and the customized state. However, this operation can be performed when the performance specific item is selected.

A main cursor G76 can be displayed on the left side of each performance specific matter area G71 to G75 to indicate that the performance specific matter has been selected. A default state and a customized state can be selected for the performance specific matters related to the performance specific matter areas G71 to G75 on which the main cursor G76 is placed to the left. Note that the display content of the main cursor G76 can be set as appropriate, but in the fourth embodiment, the main cursor G76 is composed of a black equilateral triangle with vertices arranged at the top, bottom, and right.

When the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 is displayed to the left of the first performance specific matter area G71. That is, when the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming, the first performance specific item is initially selected.

Note that below the fifth performance specific matter area G75, an explanatory text display area G77 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape to display an explanatory text regarding the performance specific matter selected by the main cursor G76. Therefore, when the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the explanatory text display area G77 includes an explanatory text regarding the first performance specific item (premier up mode) (in the fourth embodiment, "Premium performance frequency cannot be selected"). ) is displayed.

Furthermore, after the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the main cursor G76 can be moved by operating the up and down buttons 40k1, or in other words, the effect specific items to be selected can be changed. Between the performance specific matter areas G71 to G75, when the lower operation section 40kd is operated once, the main cursor G76 moves downward by one performance specific matter area G71 to G75. On the other hand, between the performance specific matter areas G71 to G75, when the upper operation section 40ku is operated once, the main cursor G76 moves upward by one performance specific matter area G71 to G75.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when the lower operation section 40kd is operated once from the situation of FIG. , and is placed to the left of the second performance specific matter area G72, and the second performance specific matter is selected. At the same time, the second performance specific matter (one shot An explanatory text (in the fourth embodiment, "You can select whether or not to make a one-shot notification") regarding the notification is displayed. Note that if the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the situation shown in FIG. 86(A) will occur.

Furthermore, when the lower operation section 40kd is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position to specify the third effect, as shown in FIG. 86(C). It is arranged to the left of the matter area G73, and the third effect specific item is selected, and the explanatory text display area G77 displays an explanatory text (in the fourth embodiment) regarding the third effect specific item (auto button). ``You can choose whether or not to use the auto button'') will be displayed. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the situation shown in FIG. 86(B) occurs.

Furthermore, when the lower operation section 40kd is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position, and the fourth effect is specified, as shown in FIG. 86(D). It is arranged to the left of the matter area G74, and the fourth effect specific matter is selected, and the explanatory text display area G77 displays an explanatory text (in the fourth embodiment) regarding the fourth effect specific matter (3D). ``You can select whether or not to use 3D'') is displayed. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the situation shown in FIG. 86(C) occurs.

In addition, when the lower operation section 40kd is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the main cursor G76 moves downward by one position to specify the fifth effect, as shown in FIG. 86(E). It is arranged to the left of the matter area G75, and the fifth effect specific matter is selected, and the explanatory text display area G77 displays an explanatory text (in the fourth embodiment) regarding the fifth effect specific matter (pre-reading chance). ``You can select whether or not to use a look-ahead effect.'') is displayed. Note that when the upper operation unit 40ku is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the situation shown in FIG. 86(D) occurs.

Although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the first customization selection section G71b. , the customized state (premier up mode ON setting) is selected for the first performance specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the first sub-cursor G71c moves to the left side and is displayed overlapping the first default selection section G71a, and the first effect specific item is in the default state ( OFF setting of Premier Up Mode) is selected.

Although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B), the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the second customization selection section G72b. , the customized state (OFF setting of one-shot notification) is selected for the second performance specific item. On the other hand, in this situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the second sub-cursor G72c moves to the left side and is displayed overlapping the second default selection section G72a, and the second effect specific item is in the default state ( One-shot notification ON setting) is selected.

Although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C), the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the third customization selection section G73b. , the customization state (auto button ON setting) is selected for the third performance specific item. On the other hand, in this situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the third sub-cursor G73c moves to the left side and is displayed overlapping the third default selection section G73a, and the third effect specific item is in the default state ( Auto button OFF setting) is selected.

Although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fourth customization selection section G74b. , the customized state (3D OFF setting) is selected for the fourth effect specific item. On the other hand, in this situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the fourth sub-cursor G74c moves to the left side and is displayed overlapping the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fourth effect specific item is in the default state ( 3D ON setting) is selected.

Although not shown, when the right operation section 40kr is operated once in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the right and is displayed overlapping the fifth customization selection section G75b. , the customization state (setting OFF of pre-reading chance) is selected for the fifth performance specific item. On the other hand, in that situation, when the left operation section 40kl is operated once, the fifth sub-cursor G75c moves to the left side and is displayed overlapping the fifth default selection section G75a, and the fifth effect specific item is in the default state ( (ON setting of pre-read chance) is selected.

The production control board 120 (production control microcomputer 121) can store the position of the main cursor G76, in other words, the production specific item selected by the main cursor G76 in the production RAM 124. As mentioned above, the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is always displayed with the first production specific item selected, so when the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the production control microcomputer 121 , information indicating that the first effect specific item is currently selected is stored in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Then, when the lower operation part detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. do. Similarly, when the lower operation part detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the upper operation part detection signal is input, information indicating that the first effect specifying item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Furthermore, when the lower operation part detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the upper operation part detection signal is input, information indicating that the second effect specifying item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Furthermore, when the lower operation part detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the upper operation part detection signal is input, information indicating that the third effect specifying item is selected is stored in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Furthermore, when the upper operation part detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. do.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 updates the information stored in the performance specific matter storage unit 128 as appropriate when the left and right buttons 40k2 are operated. For example, in a complete default state as shown in FIG. 85 (FIG. 86(A)), the production control microcomputer 121 sets a premium up mode flag, a one-shot notification prohibition flag, an auto button flag, a 3D prohibition flag, and a prefetch prohibition flag. The flag is turned OFF.

For example, when the right operation section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(A), the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the premium up mode flag. On the contrary, when the left operation section detection signal is inputted in a situation where the premium up mode flag is turned on, the production control microcomputer 121 turns off the premium up mode flag. Similarly, the production control microcomputer 121 turns on the one-shot announcement prohibition flag when the right operation section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(B). On the other hand, when the left operation section detection signal is input in a situation where the one-shot announcement prohibition flag is ON, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns the one-shot announcement prohibition flag OFF. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the auto button flag when the right operation section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(C). On the contrary, when the left operation section detection signal is inputted in a situation where the auto button flag is ON, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns the auto button flag OFF. Furthermore, when the right operation section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(D), the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the 3D prohibition flag. On the other hand, when the left operation section detection signal is input in a situation where the 3D prohibition flag is ON, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns the 3D prohibition flag OFF. Furthermore, when the right operation section detection signal is input in the situation shown in FIG. 86(E), the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the prefetch prohibition flag. On the contrary, when the left operation section detection signal is inputted in a situation where the prefetch prohibition flag is ON, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns the prefetch prohibition flag OFF.

In addition, below the explanatory text display area G77, there is an end section G78 indicating that it has been selected to end the operation related to the custom function during non-gaming, in other words, to close the custom operation screen G102 during non-gaming. Initialization sections G79 indicating that it is selected to set each production specific item to a default state are arranged side by side in the left and right direction. The ending section G78 and the initializing section G79 can be selected using the main cursor G76. As shown in FIG. 86(E), when the lower operation section 40kd is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the fifth performance specific matter area G75, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end section G78. Move next door. Further, when the right operation section 40kr is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end section G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the initialization section G79. Further, when the left operation section 40kl is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of the initialization section G79, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the end section G78. Furthermore, when the upper operation section 40ku is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is arranged to the left of the end section G78, the main cursor G76 moves to the left of the fifth performance specific matter area G75.

Then, when the first effect button 41k is operated in a situation where the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of the end part G78, the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen, and the non-gaming custom operation is performed. At the same time, the state of each performance specific matter indicated by the position of the sub cursor G71c to G75c in each performance specific matter area G71 to G75 at that time is determined (default state/customized state).

For example, as shown in FIG. 87(A), the player ultimately selects the first customization selection section G71b with the first sub-cursor G71c, and selects the second default selection section G72a with the second sub-cursor G72c. Then, the third sub-cursor G73c selects the third customization selection section G73b, the fourth sub-cursor G74c selects the fourth default selection section G74a, and the fifth sub-cursor G75c selects the fifth customization selection section G75b. In other words, the customized state is selected for the first performance specific matter, the third performance specific matter, and the fifth performance specific matter, and the default state is selected for the second performance specific matter and the fourth performance specific matter. Suppose that you are put in a state where Further, the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of the end portion G78.

When the first performance button 41k is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 87(A), the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen as shown in FIG. 87(B). As a result, custom operations cannot be performed during non-gaming, and the states related to various performance specific items are determined, but as shown in FIG. 87(A), the customization state is selected for even one of the performance specific items. When the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is switched to the setting selection screen in a state where the custom operation screen G102 is in the state where A flag (effect customization state flag) indicating that the state is not a complete default state is turned on.

When the player starts playing the game from the situation shown in FIG. 87(B), for example, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 11 and the special figure 1 variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 87(C). As shown, the screen transition explanation image G70 disappears, the setting selection screen is switched to the game screen, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been stopped and displayed start variable display (special figure variable effect). In this way, after the pachinko gaming machine PY4 as a whole is changed from the default state to the customized state by the non-gaming custom operation while the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed, the special figure variation effect is performed first. In this case, the in-game custom operation image G80, which will be described later, is not displayed.

Next, custom operations during gaming will be explained. FIGS. 88 to 90 are explanatory diagrams illustrating custom operations during a game.

After the situation shown in FIG. 87(C), for example, the special figure 1 variable display is executed multiple times in succession, and finally, the stop display of the special figure 1 in a manner indicating a loss is performed, and accordingly Suppose that the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates a loss. And here, as shown in FIG. 88(A), if 30 seconds continues without the next special figure 1 variable display being performed, in other words, the special figure 1 variable display or the jackpot game is not being executed. When the customer waiting state continues for 30 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 displays a customer waiting demonstration video G100 on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 88(B).

Next, after the customer waiting demonstration video G100 as shown in FIG. When the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is switched to the first normal background image G111, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are being displayed in a variable manner appear. At this timing, the production control microcomputer 121 displays an image G80 for performing a custom operation during the game (custom operation image during the game) superimposed on the first normal background image G111 near the upper left corner of the display section 50a. to be displayed.

In this way, after the production control microcomputer 121 enters the customized state by the operation on the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 (non-gaming custom operation), the special figure variable display is performed once, and then it waits for the customer again. state, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special symbol variable display is executed, and when the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special symbol variation production) is performed, the custom operation image during the game G80 is displayed to enable custom operations during the game. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 changes the special figure variable display ( When the variable display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, special symbol variable performance) is started, a custom operation image G80 during the game is displayed to enable the custom operation during the game.

Note that this is a "customer waiting state that was newly started (transitioned to) after the performance customization state flag was turned ON", so for example, the situation shown in FIG. 87(B) shifts to the situation shown in FIG. 87(C). Even if the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed without the customer waiting demo video G100, the customer waiting demo video G100 is the customer waiting demo video that was first displayed in the customer waiting state where the customer is already staying when the effect customization state flag is turned ON. G100, and is not the customer waiting demo video G100 that was displayed in the customer waiting state that was newly started (shifted to) after the production customization state flag was turned ON. Even if the variable display (variable display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, special figure variable performance) is started, the custom operation image G80 is not displayed during the game. Furthermore, for example, even if the customer waiting state is started for the first time after the production customization state flag is turned ON, the special pattern variable display (variable display of production patterns EZ1 to EZ3, special Even if the figure variation effect) is started, the custom operation image G80 during the game is not displayed. In other words, the conditions for displaying the custom operation image G80 during a game, or in other words, the conditions for enabling custom operations during a game, include at least the special figure variable display being performed after entering the customization state, and the condition that the custom operation image G80 is displayed while waiting for a customer. This includes starting the special figure variable display (variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, special figure variable effect) from the state where the demonstration video G100 is displayed.

Furthermore, when the performance control microcomputer 121 displays the custom operation image G80 during the game, it turns off the aforementioned performance customization state flag. Further, in the fourth embodiment, for example, in a situation where the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(A), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, When the variable display in FIG. 1 starts, the situation as shown in FIG. 87(C) occurs. Incidentally, the transition of this situation is the same whether the effect specifying items are in a completely default state or at least partially in a customized state on the non-gaming custom operation screen G102. Moreover, if the customization state is established at that time, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance customization state flag when the special figure 1 variable display starts. That is, to start the special figure variable display in a situation where the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming, the first effect button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of the end part G78. It has the same functionality as that.

By the way, the in-game custom operation image G80 shown in FIG. 88(C) is a simplified version. Here, the in-game custom operation image G80 will be explained in detail. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the in-game custom operation image G80.

FIG. 89(A) shows the state of the in-game custom operation image G80 immediately after the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 89(A), the in-gaming custom operation image G80 is generally formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and inside is written "Do you want to continue customizing?". That is, the in-game custom operation image G80 functions as a performance that asks whether or not to continue the customization state of the performance specific items. Furthermore, inside the in-game custom operation image G80, there is a continuation selection section G81 indicating that the customization state is to be continued, an end selection section G82 that is indicating that the customization state is to be terminated, and a continuation selection section G81. A cursor G83 that can be moved between the end selection section G82 and the placed one indicating that it is selected and the remaining time during which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed (in-game custom remaining time ) is provided. In addition, the notation "Do you want to continue customizing?", which is used by the in-game custom operation image G80 to function as an effect that asks whether or not to continue the customization state of the effect specific items, means that the player can customize the effect specific items. It may be changed as appropriate to the extent that it is possible to recognize that a question is being asked about whether or not to continue the state.

The in-game custom operation can be executed while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, and the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed for 3 seconds. That is, the valid time for custom operations during gaming is 3 seconds. The remaining time display section G84 representing the custom remaining time during the game is composed of a linear progress bar, and changes as time passes so that the player can easily understand the custom remaining time during the game.

Further, the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 are formed in the same substantially horizontally long rectangular shape and are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the continuation selection section G81 is arranged on the left side, and the end selection section G82 is arranged on the right side. The cursor G83 is composed of a frame-shaped figure that exactly overlaps the outer periphery of the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, and when the custom operation image G80 during gaming is displayed, the cursor G83 It is displayed overlapping the outer circumferential line of . That is, when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, it means that the end of the customization state has been selected. Note that since the line associated with the cursor G83 is considerably thicker than the outer circumferential lines of the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82, the player cannot place the cursor G83 on either of the continuation selection section G81 or the end selection section G82. It shall be possible to easily understand whether the

When the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, the cursor G83 is moved alternately between the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82 by operating the left and right buttons 40k2, in other words, the cursor G83 is moved alternately between the continuation selection section G81 and the end selection section G82. and end can be selected alternately. The cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection section G82, and when the left operation section 40kl is operated while the end selection section G82 is selected, the cursor G83 moves to the left and overlaps the continuation selection section G81, The continuation selection section G81 is now selected. On the other hand, when the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the continuation selection section G81 and the right operation section 40kr is operated while the continuation selection section G81 is selected, the cursor G83 moves to the right and moves to the end selection section G82. They overlap, and the end selection section G82 is in a selected state.

For example, when the cursor G83 shown in FIG. 89(A) selects the end selection section G82, a little time (0.75 seconds) has passed and the situation shown in FIG. 89(B) is reached. When the operation section 40kl is operated, the cursor G83 enters a state in which the continuation selection section G81 is selected, as shown in FIG. 89(C). Furthermore, when the right operation section 40kr is operated, the cursor G83 enters a state in which the end selection section G82 is selected, as shown in FIG. 89(D).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 89(A) to 89(D), the remaining time during the game related to the remaining time display section G84 is changed according to the elapse of time after the during-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. The represented portion (the colored portion in FIG. 89) shrinks toward the left. When the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds, the portion representing the custom remaining time during the game in the remaining time display section G84 disappears, as shown in FIG. 89(E).

Then, as soon as the part representing the remaining time during the game custom in the remaining time display section G84 disappears, the custom operation image during the game G80 disappears, as shown in FIG. 90. As shown in FIGS. 89(A) to 89(E), while time has passed since the custom operation image G80 was displayed during the game, the left and right buttons 40k2 are operated and the cursor G83 moves to the continuation selection section G81. It is assumed that even if the special figure variation effect is moved between and the end selection part G82, the special figure variation effect is developed as appropriate on the display part 50a without being affected by these movements.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 is assumed to grasp in real time whether the cursor G83 is selecting either the continuation selection section G81 or the end selection section G82. Then, customization is controlled according to the arrangement of the cursor G83 when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds. Specifically, when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds and the cursor G83 selects the end selection section G82, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects all the flags in the performance specific item storage section 128. By turning OFF, the performance specific items are set to a complete default state. On the other hand, when the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 maintains all the flags in the performance specific item storage section 128. By doing so, the current customization state regarding the performance specific matters is continued.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(E), when the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds in a situation where the cursor G83 selects the end selection section G82, the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the performance specific items. All the flags (premier up mode flag, one-shot notification prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, pre-reading prohibition flag) stored in the section 128 are turned off to put the performance specific matter in a complete default state. In this case, when the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed for the first time, as shown in FIG. Displayed with G71a to G75a selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 89(D), if the custom remaining time during the game reaches 0 seconds while the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81, the performance control microcomputer 121 All flags (premier up mode flag, one-shot notification prohibition flag, auto button flag, 3D prohibition flag, prefetch prohibition flag) stored in the storage unit 128 are kept ON/OFF, and the current state of production specific matters is maintained. Continue customization state. In this case, when the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed for the first time after that, the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is changed to the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 as shown in FIG. 88(C). The same content as the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 that was set to the customized state most recently before the image G80 was displayed (sub cursors G71c, G73c, G75c select customization selection sections G71b, G73b, G75b, sub cursors G72c, G73c is displayed in the default selection section G72a and G74a (contents in which G73c is selected).

Note that, as described above, as shown in FIG. 88(C), when the custom operation image G80 is displayed during the game, the performance customization state flag is turned OFF. Then, this effect customization state flag that is turned OFF remains ON even when the remaining time for customization during gaming reaches 0 seconds, for example, in a situation where the cursor G83 selects the continuation selection section G81 in the corresponding in-game custom operation image G80. Not done. Therefore, when the customization state is continued as a custom operation during a game, even if the customization state is maintained after that, the customer waiting state is entered and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed on the display section 50a. , When the special symbol variable display is started while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, and the special symbol variable display (variable display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3) is started, the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. Not done.

In addition, from the perspective of changing various performance specific items, for example, the performance specific items are in a customized state, and the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming in a state as shown in FIG. Assume that the middle custom operation has finally led to a transition to the settings selection screen in a situation where the sub cursors G71c to G75c have selected the default selection sections G71a to G75a. In other words, it is assumed that the customized state changes to the default state due to a custom operation during non-gaming. In this case, although changes have been made regarding the performance specific items, the performance customization state flag is not turned on. Therefore, after this, the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special figure variable display is executed, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 Even if the variable display (special figure variable effect) is performed, the custom operation image G80 during the game is not displayed. In other words, no opportunity arises to enable custom operations during the game.

Furthermore, from the perspective of changing various performance specific items, for example, the performance specific items are in a customized state, the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming in a state as shown in FIG. 87(A), and then the non-gaming As a result of the middle custom operation, the setting selection screen was finally displayed with sub cursors G71c to G73c selecting customization selection sections G71b to G73b and sub cursors G74c to G75c selecting customization selection sections G74b to G75b. shall be. In other words, assume that a customization state is changed from one customization state to another by a customization operation during non-gaming. In this case, it is assumed that the effect customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special figure variable display is executed, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 When the variable display (special figure variable effect) is performed, the custom operation image G80 during the game is displayed, and the custom operation during the game becomes possible. Note that the subsequent display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed is the same as when changing from the default state to the customization state.

In addition, from the perspective of changing each performance specific item, for example, the performance specific item is in the default state and the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming in a state as shown in FIG. 87(A), but after that, the If the button 40k is not operated or the cross button 40k is operated, the sub cursors G71c, G74c, G75c will eventually select the customization selection sections G71b, G73b, G75b, and the sub cursors G72c, G74c will select the customization selection sections G71b, G73b, G75b. Assume that the default selection section G72b, G72b is selected and the setting selection screen is displayed. In other words, assume that the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed once, but the default state remains unchanged from before the screen was displayed. In this case, it is assumed that the effect customization state flag is turned ON. Therefore, after this, the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special figure variable display is executed, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 When the variable display (special figure variable effect) is performed, the custom operation image G80 during the game is displayed, and the custom operation during the game becomes possible. Note that the subsequent display control when the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed is the same as when changing from the default state to the customization state.

Furthermore, from the perspective of changing each effect specific item, for example, the effect specific item is in the default state and the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming in the state shown in FIG. 85(A), but after that, the If the button 40k is not operated, or if the cross button 40k is operated, but as a result, the sub cursors G71c to G75c end up selecting the default selection sections G71a to G75a, and the screen transitions to the settings selection screen. shall be. In other words, assume that the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed once, but the default state remains unchanged as before the screen was displayed. In this case, although changes have been made regarding the performance specific items, the performance customization state flag is not turned on. Therefore, after this, the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the customer waiting state is again displayed, and the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, and from that state, the special figure variable display is executed, and the production patterns EZ1 to EZ3 Even if the variable display (special figure variable effect) is performed, the custom operation image G80 during the game is not displayed. In other words, no opportunity arises to enable custom operations during the game.

Although a description of the specific performance contents and control contents related to the premiere performance, one-shot announcement, automatic button, performance using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, and pre-reading chance will be omitted, the performance control board 120 is capable of specifying the performance. Based on the information stored in the item storage unit 128, the premiere performance, one-shot announcement, auto button, performance using naked-eye 3D stereoscopic vision, and pre-reading chance shall be controlled as appropriate.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY4, the specifications of performance specific matters (first performance specific matter to fifth performance specific matter: specific matters related to performance) include the default state (default first specification), There is a customized state (a second specification that is different from the first specification), and as a specification of production specific matters (first production specific matter to fifth production specific matter: specific matters related to production), there is a customized state (different from the first specification). 2nd specification), the in-game custom operation image G80 that asks about the continuation of the settings of the customized state (the 2nd specification different from the 1st specification) can be displayed on the display unit 50a (specific display can be executed on the display unit). (possible), it is possible to prevent a player from playing the game with unintended specifications, for example, if the player does not know that there is a function that allows the player to change the specific items of the performance, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game. It can be suppressed. In addition, in the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) and in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) where the jackpot game (specific game) is not being executed, game balls enter the starting holes 11 and 12 (predetermined Since the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed (execution of specific display) when the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) is executed (conditions are met), it is particularly important to Since the player who has started playing the game can be made aware of the function of changing performance specific items, it is possible to further suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state), the specifications of performance specific matters (specific matters related to performance) can be customized from the default state (first specification) by operating the cross button 40k or the first performance button 41k (operation means). The state (second specification) can be changed, and the specifications of production specific matters (specific matters related to production) can be changed from the default state (first specification) to the customized state (second specification) in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state). If changed, in the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) that is executed when a game ball enters the starting port 11, 12 (predetermined conditions are met) in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state). The custom operation image G80 is not displayed (specific display is executed) during gaming, and game balls enter the starting ports 11 and 12 in the customer waiting state (non-gaming state) that occurs next (predetermined conditions are met). During the game, the custom operation image G80 may be displayed (executing a specific display) in the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information) that is executed (in the special figure variable display (variable display of identification information)). Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by displaying the custom operation image G80 during the game to the changed player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be explained. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

Performance specific items that can be arbitrarily set by the player include a premium up mode, one-shot notification, auto button, 3D, and pre-reading chance, but the specific content of the performance specific items is not particularly limited. You may change it as appropriate. Furthermore, although there are five types of effect specifying items that can be arbitrarily set by the player, the number of types is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

The non-game custom operation screen G102 is displayed when the up and down buttons 40k1 (upper operation section 40ku or lower operation section 40kd) are operated when the setting selection screen is displayed, but the non-game custom operation screen G102 The display method of screen G102 is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when the first performance button 41k or the second performance button 42k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is being displayed, the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 may be displayed. Or, in the state of waiting for a customer, on the display section 50a, performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a loss in the background image normally displayed in a variable manner, such as the first normal background image G111, are displayed in a superimposed manner. If the first performance button 41k or the second performance button 42k is operated while the game is being played, the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 may be displayed.

Furthermore, if the first effect button 41k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, a setting selection screen is displayed, but the display method of the custom operation screen G102 during non-gaming is not particularly limited and may be used as appropriate. You may change it to For example, in the customer waiting state, when the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, no matter how you operate the cross button 40k, the first effect button 41k, or the second effect button 42k, the screen will not switch to the setting selection screen. However, the performance time of the customer waiting demonstration video G100 may be set, and the screen may be switched to the setting selection screen when the customer waiting demonstration video G100 ends. In this case, the continuous display time of the setting selection screen is set, and unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated, the continuous display time will elapse after the setting selection screen is displayed. , the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is switched again, and thereafter, unless the up/down button 40k1 or the left/right button 40k2 is operated on the setting selection screen, the customer waiting demonstration video G100 and the setting selection screen may be repeatedly displayed alternately. .

The display content and layout of the custom operation screen G102 during non-gaming is a range in which the player can arbitrarily set the state (default state/customized state) related to various performance specific items by operation when the screen G102 is displayed. You may change it as appropriate. For example, the operating method for moving the main cursor G76 (method for selecting production specific items) and the operating method for moving each sub-cursor G71c to G75c (method for selecting the state related to various production specific items) may be changed as appropriate. Good too.

Furthermore, when the first effect button 41k is operated on the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 when the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of the end section G78, the screen switches to the setting selection screen, and the sub cursor at that time Although the states related to various performance specific matters are determined based on the positions of G71c to G75c (the state of sub cursors G71c to G75c overlapping any of the default selection sections G71a to G75a or the customization selection sections G71b to G75b), The operating method for this determination may also be changed as appropriate. For example, if the first performance button 41k is operated while the main cursor G76 is placed to the left of any of the performance specific items G71 to G75, the screen switches to the setting selection screen, and the sub cursor G71c to G75c at that time is displayed. The state may be determined based on various performance specific matters based on the position of.

When the special figure variable display is started while the custom operation screen G102 is displayed during non-gaming, the state related to various performance specific matters is determined based on the position of the sub cursors G71c to G75c at that time. In this case, even if the state related to any of the performance specific items has been changed since the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 was displayed, the change is not recognized and the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed. It may also be possible to set the state to be in a state related to performance specific matters when the event occurs.

The time period during which the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, in other words, the valid time period for the in-game custom operation is not particularly limited, and may be changed as appropriate. In addition, the display content and layout of the in-game custom operation image G80 may be changed as appropriate to the extent that the player can arbitrarily set the continuation or termination of the customization state by operation while the in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed. You may. For example, each time the first effect button 41k is operated, the cursor G83 is moved to the unselected side, etc. Even if the operation method for moving the cursor G83 (method for selecting whether to continue or end the customization state) is changed as appropriate. good.

Furthermore, when the custom operation image G80 during gaming is displayed, the cursor G83 is displayed overlapping the end selection section G82, in other words, the end of the customization state is selected, but the cursor G83 is displayed over the continuation selection section G81. In other words, it may be displayed so that the continuation of the customization state is selected.

If continuation of the customization state is selected by the custom operation during the game, then the customer waiting state is entered, and when the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed in the customer waiting state, the special figure variable display starts and the special figure is displayed. When a variable performance is executed, the custom operation image G80 during the game is not displayed in the special figure fluctuation performance, but the custom operation image G80 during the game may be displayed. In this case, as long as the customization state continues, the in-game custom operation image G80 may be displayed every time in the first special figure variation effect executed from the customer waiting demo video G100, Even if the customization state continues, a restriction may be placed on the display of the in-game custom operation image G80, such as until the first predetermined number of times or until a specific period thereafter.

After entering the customized state by operating on the custom operation screen G102 during non-gaming (custom operation during non-gaming), the special figure variable display is performed once, and then the state returns to the customer waiting state and the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed. Then, from this state, the first special pattern variable display is executed, and when the first variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special pattern variable effect) is performed, the custom operation image G80 is displayed during the game. However, the setting selection screen is displayed while waiting for customers again, and from that state, the first variable display of special symbols is executed, and the first variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 (special symbol variation production) is performed. The custom operation image G80 may also be displayed during the game.

When a customization state changes from one customization state to another due to an operation on the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 (non-gaming custom operation), the during-game custom operation image G80 is displayed in a subsequent specific special figure variation effect. However, in this case, the custom operation image G80 may not be displayed during the game.

Although the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed in a certain customization state, even if the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is closed without changing the customization state, the subsequent special figure variation effect The in-game custom operation image G80 is displayed, but in this case, the in-game custom operation image G80 may not be displayed.

The non-gaming custom operation screen G102 is displayed in the complete default state, and if even one production specific item becomes customized by the operation on the non-gaming custom operation screen G102 (non-gaming custom operation), the subsequent specific The custom operation image G80 is displayed during the game in the special figure variation effect, but for example, there are two types of effect specific items: specific effect specific items and non-specific effect specific items. The condition for displaying the in-gaming custom operation image G80 is that the performance specific items are in the customized state, and even if only the non-specific performance specific items are in the customized state, the in-game custom operation Image G80 may not be displayed. To distinguish between specific performance specific items and non-specific performance specific items, for example, performance specific items that can be set other than custom operations during non-gaming become non-specific performance specific items, and custom operations during non-gaming. The effect specific items that can only be set may be specific effect specific items.

If the in-game custom operation image G80 disappears while the end of the customization state is selected (when the in-game custom operation ends), the production control microcomputer 121 at that time sets the flags related to all production specific matters. However, the timing of turning this OFF, in other words, the timing of transition to the complete default state of the performance specific items.Turns off the flags related to all performance specific items.Turns off the flags related to all performance specific items. There is no particular limitation on how to turn off the flag, and the flag may be changed as appropriate. For example, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls all the functions when the special figure variation effect that is being performed while the custom operation image G80 is displayed during the game ends, or when the next special figure variation effect starts. The flag related to the production specific matter may be turned off.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, the fifth embodiment will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the basic embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

The pachinko game machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment is composed of a so-called "1 type 2 type mixing machine". In one pachinko game machine PY5, when a special drawing 1 lottery is held and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a jackpot game in which the first jackpot 14 (described later) is opened is played. When a special drawing 2 lottery is held based on the specification called "Type 1 (so-called "DigiPachi type")" and the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 12, and you win a small prize, A small winning game in which a second big prize opening 15 (described later) is opened is executed, and a game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 opened in the small winning game is placed in a specific area 16 (so-called "V zone"), which will be described later. There is also a specification called "second type (so-called "feather monotype")" in which a jackpot game is executed when the player passes (so-called "V winning").

Here, FIG. 92 shows a front view of the game board unit YU of the pachinko game machine PY5. As shown in FIG. 92, the gaming area 6 includes a first grand prize device 14D and a second grand prize device 15D that can be reversibly changed between a state in which game balls cannot win and a state in which they can win. is provided. The first big winning device 14D corresponds to the big winning device 14D of the basic embodiment. Therefore, the first grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a first grand prize opening 14 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by a first AT opening/closing member 14k provided in the first big prize winning device 14D. Further, the first big winning device 14D is provided with a first big winning hole sensor 14a that detects that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14 (winning).

The second grand prize device 15D is provided directly under the downstream side of the first grand prize device 14D, and is partially configured in the same manner as the first grand prize device 14D. The second grand prize winning device 15D is formed with a second grand prize opening 15 that can change between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. , it takes a closed mode and an open mode by the second AT opening/closing member 15k provided in the second big winning device 15D. Further, the second big winning device 15D is provided with a second big winning hole sensor 15a that detects that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15 (winning).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the first big winning hole 14. In addition, 15 prize balls are paid out as the balls enter the second grand prize opening 15.

Next, the structure of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 will be explained. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the configuration of the game board 1 after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15. As shown in FIG. 91, as a configuration after the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15, a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 are provided through which the gaming ball that entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass. It is being Further, a sorting member 16k is provided which can sort the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 15 into a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17.

The distribution member 16k is configured to be movable forward and backward by a distribution solenoid 16s (see FIG. 94). The distribution solenoid 16s is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and the game control microcomputer 101 can control the distribution solenoid 16s in a small winning game to be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 moves the distribution member 16k forward and backward using the distribution solenoid 16s, thereby setting a first passage state in which the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16, and a second state. It is possible to set the state to either a second passing state in which the game ball that enters the two major winning holes 15 can pass through the non-specific area 17. The sorting member 16k is normally held at the advanced position so as to be in the second passing state, and when playing a small winning game, it is retracted to the retracted position for a predetermined time (for example, 2.8 seconds) and then returned to the first passing state. Change. Details of the operation of the distribution member 16k in the small winning game will be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine PY5 is provided with a specific area sensor 16a (see FIG. 91) that detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16, but does not detect game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 17. The specific area sensor 16a is electrically connected to the game control microcomputer 101, and when it detects a game ball, it outputs a signal indicating that it has detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 to the game control board 100.

In addition, a transparent window (not shown) made of synthetic resin is provided in front of the specific area 16 and the non-specific area 17, so that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 and the non-specific area. The player can visually confirm which of the 17 passes the player has passed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko game machine PY5 will be explained. FIG. 94 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board 100 side in the pachinko gaming machine PY5. As shown in FIG. 94, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include a first AT solenoid 14s, a second AT solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s.

The game control board 100 sends signals for controlling the driving of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s to each of the first AT solenoid 14s, the second AT solenoid 15s, and the distribution solenoid 16s. It is possible to output The first AT solenoid 14s is connected to the first AT opening/closing member 14k, and when the first AT solenoid 14s is driven, the first AT opening/closing member 14k performs an opening/closing operation. The second AT solenoid 15s is connected to the second AT opening/closing member 15k, and when the second AT solenoid 15s is driven, the second AT opening/closing member 15k performs an opening/closing operation. The distribution solenoid 16s is connected to the distribution member 16k, and the distribution member 16k moves forward and backward with respect to the front surface of the game board 1 when the distribution solenoid 16s is driven.

In addition, as various sensors connected to the game control board 100, a first big winning hole sensor 14a, a second big winning hole sensor 15a, and a specific area sensor 16a are connected to the game control board 100 so that they can output signals. ing. The first big winning hole sensor 14a can detect a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 14, and when it detects a game ball, it sends a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first big winning hole 14. Output to control board 100. The second big winning hole sensor 15a can detect the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 15, and when it detects the game ball, it sends a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second big winning hole 15. Output to control board 100. The specific area sensor 16a is capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area 16, and when detecting a game ball, outputs a signal indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 16 (V winning) to the game control board 100. do.

Next, the electrical configuration on the production control board 120 side in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration on the production control board 120 side in the fifth embodiment.

The details will be described later, but the performance control microcomputer 121 of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 is triggered by a game state that is advantageous to the player, more specifically, when a jackpot occurs during the special symbol fluctuation display in the normal game state. In the so-called "consecutive games" after entering the time-saving state and then losing in the special symbol fluctuation display in the time-saving state and returning to the normal gaming state, the time that has passed since the first time-saving state entered ( Measure the elapsed time (elapsed time). The performance RAM 124 is provided with a timer 128 (consecutive play elapsed time timer) for measuring the elapsed time of consecutive matches. The consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is initially set to "0". When the production control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the elapsed time of consecutive games, it performs a timer update process (S4104) to appropriately update the consecutive games elapsed time timer 128 according to the elapsed time. That is, each time the timer update process is performed, the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is counted up by 1 msec.

Further, the connection between the payout control board 170 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the payout control board 170 to the production control board 120. That is, between the payout control board 170 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means. In the fifth embodiment, the payout control board 170 directly outputs the signal (contact detection signal) output from the touch switch 72a to the production control board 120. When the player is in contact with the handle 72k, a contact detection signal is output (turned ON), and when the player is not in contact with the handle 72k, the contact detection signal is not output (turned OFF). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 can detect whether the player is in contact with the handle 72k or not. In addition, the fact that the player is not in contact with the handle 72k means that the game ball firing operation is not being performed, or in other words, the game ball firing has stopped. 121 means that it is also possible to detect that the game ball firing operation is not being performed and that the game ball firing has stopped.

Next, the game states that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY5 will be explained. In the pachinko game machine PY5, only one type of normal probability state is set as a gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot in jackpot determination. On the other hand, as the gaming states related to the winning ease of the second starting opening 12, a non-time saving state (low base state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set, as in the basic embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the low probability low base gaming state will be referred to as the "normal gaming state", and the low probability high base gaming state will simply be referred to as the "time saving state".

In addition, the pachinko game machine PY5, in the normal gaming state, does not aim to win the first starting hole 11 by continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting the left hand so that the first starting hole 11 wins. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball with a right hit so as to cause the second starting hole 12 to win a prize. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state, it is more likely that the game ball will land in the first starting hole 11 than in the second starting hole 12 by continuing to fire the game ball with the right shot aiming to make it win in the second starting hole 12. It is configured so that it is easier to continue firing the game ball by hitting to the left while aiming at it, and to win the prize at the first starting hole 11.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when a prize is won in the first starting port 11, up to four special drawings 1 can be held as in the basic embodiment, but in the second starting port 12 If you win a prize, special drawing 2 reservation cannot occur. In other words, the upper limit of the number of special figures 1 reserved is four, and the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reserved is "0".

Next, jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. An example of the configuration of the jackpot determination table referred to in the jackpot determination according to the fifth embodiment is shown in FIG. 96(A). As shown in FIG. 96(A), as a jackpot judgment table, a jackpot judgment table (first jackpot judgment table) related to special drawing 1 used in jackpot judgment (first jackpot judgment) based on winning in the first starting opening 11 is used. ) and a jackpot judgment table (second jackpot judgment table) related to the special drawings 2 used in jackpot judgment (second jackpot judgment) based on winnings in the second starting opening 12.

According to the first jackpot determination table, in the first jackpot determination, it is determined to be a jackpot or a loss. On the other hand, according to the second jackpot determination table, in the second jackpot determination, a small win or a loss is determined. As will be described later, when a small hit is determined in the second jackpot determination, a stop display of the special figure 2 is executed in a manner that finally indicates a small hit on the special figure 2 variable display (a predetermined result of "small win" is displayed). is derived), and a small winning game is executed according to the stop display. Then, when the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game passes through the specific area 16, the big winning game is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96(A), in the first jackpot determination, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is set to 1/319. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination, the probability of determining a small win is set to 266/319 (≈1/1.2). As in the basic embodiment, in each jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is shown in FIG. 96(A) for the jackpot judgment result, small win, and loss. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. However, the jackpot selection rate and the small win selection rate are not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the first jackpot determination, a small win may be included as a jackpot determination result. Alternatively, in the second jackpot determination, a jackpot may be included as a jackpot determination result.

Next, a jackpot symbol and a small prize symbol according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. As mentioned above, the jackpot symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of jackpot as well as the jackpot win. The jackpot symbol is determined by jackpot symbol type determination, and the jackpot symbol type determination is performed using a jackpot symbol type determination table. FIG. 96(B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(B), two types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A and a jackpot symbol B, are provided as the jackpot symbols of the special drawing 1. According to the jackpot symbol type determination table related to special drawing 1, jackpot symbol A is selected with a probability of 50%, and jackpot symbol B is selected with a probability of 50%.

In addition, the small winning symbol is a special symbol that indicates the type of small winning as well as the small winning. In the special symbol variable display when a small hit is won, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a derivation of the result of the jackpot determination. The small winning symbol is determined by small winning symbol type determination, and the small winning symbol type determination is performed using a small winning symbol type determination table. FIG. 96(C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning symbol type determination table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(C), one type of small winning pattern, small winning pattern A, is provided as the small winning pattern of special drawing 2. According to the small winning symbol type determination table related to special figure 2, the small winning symbol A is selected with a probability of 100%.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the special symbol 2 related determination information includes, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol random number, jackpot symbol type random number, reach random number, and special symbol variation pattern random number, a small number for determining the small winning symbol type. It also includes the winning symbol type random number. Therefore, a small winning symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS) related to the small winning symbol type random number is provided in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. The small hit symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-KS), like the special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T) and the jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), uses the main random numbers for normal symbols and special symbols. It is updated in the update process (S003). Then, in step S211, the game control microcomputer 101 also acquires the small winning symbol type random number as the special figure 2 related determination information and stores it in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that the range of the small winning symbol type random number can be set as appropriate, but in the fifth embodiment, it is set to "0 to 255".

In addition, in the small winning symbol type determination table, the determination value of the small winning symbol type random number (small winning symbol type random number determination value) is shown in FIG. 96(C) for the small winning symbol type that is the result of the small winning symbol type determination. They are distributed appropriately to achieve the selectivity shown. Therefore, as will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine PY5 compares the obtained small winning symbol type random number with the small winning symbol type determination table to determine the type of the small winning symbol.

In addition, the number of jackpot symbol types, the number of small hit symbol types, the selection rate of each jackpot symbol type, and the selection rate of each small win symbol type related to special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 are as follows in the fifth embodiment. It is not limited to , and may be set as appropriate.

Next, a jackpot game according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, in the jackpot game, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball that has won the second jackpot 15 opened is It is executed when the specific area 16 is passed (V winning). The jackpot game components constituting the jackpot game, in other words, the jackpot game control table for controlling the jackpot game, determine the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, in detail, the jackpot symbol that is the trigger for executing the jackpot game. It is associated with the type and the type of small winning symbol. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

Note that even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 16 in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. Therefore, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the direct trigger for executing the jackpot game is when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 (V winning), but the game ball does not enter the second big winning opening 15. and the game ball cannot pass through the specific area 16, winning the second grand prize opening 15 can be realized by opening the second grand prize opening 15, and opening the second major prize opening 15 is a small hit. Since it is executed as a game, the stop display of small winning symbols is also included in the trigger for executing the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the following, winning a small hit in the jackpot determination and the stop display of the small winning symbol are referred to as "small hit / hitting a small hit / becoming a small hit", and winning a jackpot in the jackpot determination, a jackpot The static display of the symbols and the passage of the game ball through the specific area 16 are sometimes referred to as "hitting the jackpot/hitting the jackpot/becoming a jackpot." As will be described later, in the fifth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, as long as the game ball continues to be fired normally, the game ball will pass through the specific area 16 (V winning). A small win can essentially be regarded as a big win.

As shown in FIG. 97, a jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game") and a jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter referred to as "second jackpot game") The number of times the round game is executed is 10 times.

Further, the number of times the round game related to the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game") associated with the small winning symbol A is executed is 10 times. In addition, the third jackpot game is a small win when the game ball passes through the specific area 16 in a small win game (hereinafter also referred to as "first small win game") that is executed by the stop display of the small win symbol A. It is executed in response to the end of the game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the jackpot game component also includes the type of jackpot opening to be opened. As shown in FIG. 97, the first jackpot 14 is set to open in all round games of all jackpot games, regardless of the special symbol type. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 97, regardless of the special symbol type, for all round games of all jackpot games, the number of openings of the first big prize opening 14 in the round game is set to one, and for each opening. The relevant time (opening time) is set to 29.5 seconds, and the time required for closing after opening (closing time) is set to 2.0 seconds. Note that no closing time is set for the last round game in each jackpot game. This is because after the opening of the first grand prize opening 14 related to the last round game is completed, an ending is performed in which the first grand prize opening 14 is kept closed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, regardless of the special symbol type, the opening time ("OP time" in FIG. 97) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds, and the ending time ("OP time" in FIG. 97) of all jackpot games is set to 10.0 seconds. The "ED time") is set to 10.0 seconds.

Note that the specific values related to the jackpot game components are not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the opening time and ending time may be set to different values depending on the gaming state when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, the types of the big winning holes 14 and 15 to be opened may be different depending on the order of the round games. Furthermore, depending on the order of the round games, the number of times the big winning holes 14, 15 are opened, the total time that the big winning holes 14, 15 are open in the round game, and the closing of the big winning holes 14, 15 after opening. The relevant time (closing time) may be different. Furthermore, the number of times the round game is executed in the jackpot game and the total time during which the jackpot openings 14 and 15 can be opened may vary depending on the type of small winning symbol.

Next, a small winning game according to the fifth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY5 controls opening and closing of the big prize openings 14 and 15 in the small winning game using the small winning game control table. In the fifth embodiment, the small winning game control table can be set in association with the type of small winning symbol.

The small winning game control table stores elements (small winning game constituent elements) constituting a small winning game, especially regarding opening and closing of the large winning openings 14 and 15. The small winning game components include the type of big winning opening to be opened, the number of openings of the big winning opening in the relevant small winning game, the opening time for each opening (opening pattern), and the time to be closed until the next opening (closing time). , opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time). That is, the small winning game component is associated with the small winning symbol type. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small winning game control table according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 98, in the small winning game, the second large prize opening 15 is opened once. The opening time of the second big prize opening 15 in the small winning game is 1.8 seconds. Further, the opening time of the small winning game is 2.0 seconds, and the ending time is 2.0 seconds.

Here, details of the small winning game will be explained using FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a time chart showing the flow of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 99, when the "small winning symbol (small winning symbol A)" is stopped and displayed as the stop display of the special drawing 2, a small winning game is played. Then, in response to the start of the small winning game, an opening (small winning OP) in which the second large prize opening 15 is kept closed is performed. This small winning OP continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the small winning game, and when the small winning OP ends, the second large winning opening 15 opens (the small winning opening is performed) and the The portion member 16k is retracted and enters the first passing state. This small win release continues until 1.8 seconds have passed after the start of the release or until 10 game balls enter the second grand prize opening 15, while the retracting of the distribution member 16k This evacuation continues until 2.8 seconds have elapsed after the start of the evacuation. Then, when the small winning opening is completed, an ending (small winning ED) is performed in which the second large winning opening 15 is closed and the closed state is maintained. This small win ED continues until 2.0 seconds have passed after the start of the ED, and the small win game ends when the small win ED ends.

Since the distribution member 16k is in the retracted position in the first passing state, the game ball that enters the second big prize opening 15 during a small winning game does not flow down to the non-specific area 17 but passes through the specific area 16. On the other hand, in the second passing state, since the distribution member 16k is in the advanced position, it flows down on the distribution member 16k and passes through the non-specific area 17. Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 16, a jackpot game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is performed in accordance with the end of the small winning game.

As mentioned above, when the jackpot game corresponding to the small winning symbol type is started, the opening in which the first jackpot 14 is kept closed is performed for 10.0 seconds, and the corresponding In response to the end of the opening, the first round game is started and the first grand prize opening 14 is opened.

In addition, in the small winning game, the distribution member 16k is retracted while the second big prize opening 15 is open and until 1.0 seconds have passed after the second big winning opening 15 is closed. (the first passing state is maintained), and the game ball is in a state where it can pass through the specific area 16 (V winning). Then, when the pachinko game machine PY5 starts firing the game ball by hitting right after the start of the small winning game, and then continues firing the game ball by hitting right in the small winning game, basically ( Unless there is a particular problem), the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 16 (V win). Also, when a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 15 (wins a prize) during a small winning game, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls regardless of whether the game ball passes through the specific area 16 or not. It will be done.

Next, the game state to which the pachinko game machine PY5 newly transitions upon the end of the jackpot game, and the termination conditions related to each game state will be explained. In the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the stop display of jackpot symbols, the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned upon the end of the jackpot game, and the ending conditions related to each game state are the special It is associated with the type of design. On the other hand, when the jackpot game is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area 16 (V winning), the game state to which the jackpot game is newly transitioned and the ending conditions related to each game state are , is associated with the type of the special symbol.

FIG. 100 shows the type of special symbol (special symbol type) that triggers the occurrence of the jackpot game, the gaming state to which the jackpot game transitions when the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol type ends, and the ending conditions related to the gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a game state setting table showing the relationship.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the types of special symbols are jackpot symbol A and small prize symbol A, when the jackpot game (first jackpot game, third jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type ends, , transition to the time saving state (low probability high base gaming state). A termination condition is set for this time saving state. In the case of the jackpot symbol A and the small prize symbol A, the special figure 2 variable display is executed once. Therefore, the second big winning hole 15 is activated in the time-saving state that changes with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the jackpot symbol A is stopped and displayed, and in the small win game that is executed after the small win symbol A is stopped and displayed. The time-saving state that transitions with the end of the jackpot game that is executed after the winning game ball passes the specific area 16 is until the special figure 2 variable display is executed once without the jackpot game being executed. Can be continued. In other words, the specified number of times of the time saving state (prescribed time saving number) that is transferred upon the end of the jackpot game executed by the stop display of the jackpot symbol A, and the number of times in the small win game executed by the stop display of the small win symbol A. The prescribed number of times of the time saving state (the prescribed number of time saving times) that is transferred to the time saving state with the end of the jackpot game executed by the passage of the specific area 16 of the game ball that won the two major winning a prize openings 15 is one time.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, when the special figure 2 variable display related to a loss is executed once in the time saving state related to the jackpot symbol A and the small win symbol A, the special symbol 2 variable display related to the loss is executed once. Accordingly, the time saving state shifts to the normal gaming state. However, as mentioned above, the probability of being judged as a small hit in the second jackpot judgment is 1/1.2, so the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the special pattern 2 variable display in the time saving state. It is expected that a cycle in which V is won, a third jackpot game is executed, and a transition to a time saving state is performed in response to the end of the third jackpot game will be performed continuously to some extent. In other words, it is expected that consecutive rental properties will continue to some extent.

Further, when the special symbol type is jackpot symbol B, the game shifts to a normal gaming state (low probability low base gaming state) with the end of the jackpot game (second jackpot game) corresponding to the special symbol type. No end conditions are set for this normal gaming state.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the time saving state in the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state is the special figure 2 variation pattern in the time saving state explained in the basic embodiment. It is different from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for determining. FIG. 101 shows a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table) related to the time-saving state in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101, the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table includes a time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the jackpot determination result "Small hit" and a time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is associated with the jackpot determination result "Lose". There is also a time-saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the case of a small win, THP81 is determined with a 90% probability, and THP82 is determined with a 10% probability. In the case of a loss, THP83 is determined with a 100% probability.

Here, the flow (performance flow) of the special symbol variation performance based on each special symbol variation pattern will be explained.

In the special pattern variation performance based on THP81, the special performance is executed immediately after the start of the special pattern variation performance, and the special pattern variation performance is ended by the special performance.

In the special figure variation effect based on THP82, the special effect is executed immediately after the start of the special figure variation effect, followed by the successive show result effect, then the revival effect, and the said special figure variation is executed by the revival effect. The performance ends.

In the special figure variation effect based on THP83, the special effect is executed immediately after the start of the special figure variation effect, followed by the continuous game result effect, and the special figure variable effect is ended by the continuous game result effect.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, various special figure variation patterns (THP81 to THP83) are given the names shown in the second item from the right "Name of special figure variation pattern" of the configuration example of the special figure variation pattern determination table in FIG. 101. is attached. For example, the special pattern variation pattern "THP81" for a small hit in which the special pattern variation effect basically ends with a special effect is called a "special normal small hit variation", and the special pattern variation effect basically ends with a revival effect. The special pattern fluctuation pattern "THP82" for a small hit is called "special revival small hit fluctuation", and the special pattern fluctuation pattern "THP83" for a loss where the special pattern fluctuation performance ends with the successive winning result performance is basically called "special revival small hit fluctuation". It is called ``loss fluctuation''.

As mentioned above, in the fifth embodiment, the specified number of times of time saving is one, so if the first variable display of special figure 2 in the time saving state is a loss, the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the special performance is a performance that arouses the possibility of a small hit (actually, a big win) or a loss, as well as a game state (continuous) that is advantageous to the player by winning a small win and eventually transitioning to a time-saving state. It is also a performance that encourages players to see whether they can continue the game or whether the game will end up in a normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In the special effect, a background image dedicated to the special effect is displayed on the entire display section 50a, similar to SP reach, L reach, and the like. Although the specific display content of the background image dedicated to special effects can be set as appropriate, in the fifth embodiment, the background image dedicated to special effects is composed of a 3DCG moving image. A predetermined story is associated with a moving image that constitutes a background image dedicated to special effects. In a video related to a background image dedicated to special effects, as a predetermined story progresses, in the final phase, a performance suggesting a small win (actually a big win) will be executed (a performance suggesting a jackpot) or a loss. There comes a turning point (so-called "win/lose turning point") where the performance suggesting the loss (the loss-suggesting performance) is executed.

In the special symbol variation performance based on THP81, after the winning/losing point, a jackpot suggesting performance dedicated to the special performance is executed, and then performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a mode indicating a jackpot are displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the special pattern fluctuation effect based on THP83, after the winning/losing point, a loss-suggesting effect exclusively for the special effect is executed, followed by a consecutive-game result effect suggesting the end of the consecutive-game winnings, and then, While returning to the normal performance mode, the stop display of performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a loss is performed.

In addition, the positioning can be set as appropriate, but the jackpot suggestion effect in the special figure fluctuation effect related to THP81 is included in the special effect, and the loss suggestion effect in the special figure change effect related to THP83 is included in the special effect. It is said that

In addition, in the special figure variation effect based on THP82, as in the case of special loss variation, special effects (including loss suggestion effects) and consecutive winning result effects are executed, and then, while returning to the normal effect mode, , a temporary stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a loss is performed, but from there, a revival performance is performed to notify that it was actually a small hit, and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a manner indicating a jackpot are displayed. A stop display is displayed.

In addition, the performance flow structure of the special figure fluctuation performance based on the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern related to the time saving state. The performance time of the performance can be set as appropriate, but in the fifth embodiment, the winning/losing point is set after the special performance starts. The time is set to 7 seconds. In addition, the performance time of the jackpot suggestion performance is set to 13 seconds, the performance time of the loss suggestion performance is set to 3 seconds, the performance time of the successive win result performance is set to 5 seconds, and the performance time of the comeback performance is set to 18 seconds. , and the time from the successive success performance to the revival performance is set to 2 seconds.

Here, the consecutive winning result presentation will be explained. Although the successive winning result performance is sometimes performed due to special revival jackpot fluctuations, it is basically a performance that suggests that the winning streak will end. In the consecutive game result performance, the total number of jackpots in the consecutive games including the jackpot just before the consecutive games started (number of jackpots during the consecutive games), the jackpot game just before the consecutive games started (the first jackpot game), And the total number of game balls won by winning in the first big prize opening 14 in the jackpot game (third jackpot game) in the consecutive games (number of game balls acquired during the consecutive games), and the consecutive games result presentation ends. The elapsed time from the last consecutive home is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the performance control microcomputer 121 is configured to be able to appropriately measure the elapsed time of consecutive games, the number of jackpots during consecutive games, and the number of game balls acquired during consecutive games. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the special symbol variation production start command related to the special loss variation or the special symbol variation production start command related to the special revival jackpot variation to the output buffer of the production RAM 124, when the performance control microcomputer 121 is set to A command indicating the number of jackpots (number of jackpots during consecutive games command) and a command indicating the number of game balls acquired during consecutive games (number of game balls acquired during consecutive games command) are also set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 can appropriately measure the timing at which the consecutive game result performance starts, and at that timing, a command (consecutive game elapsed time during consecutive game result performance) indicating the elapsed consecutive game time at that time. command) in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Then, the special symbol variation production start command related to the special loss variation set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 or the special symbol variation production start command related to the special revival jackpot variation is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004). When the image is transmitted to 3 seconds + 3 seconds of loss suggesting performance), an image G91 for consecutive winning result performance (consecutive winning result performance image) is read out from the image ROM 142 and displayed in a large size near the center of the display section 50a. Here, the image CPU 141 uses the received consecutive game result rendering image G91 based on the received number of jackpots during consecutive game winnings command, number of game balls acquired during consecutive game winnings command, and consecutive game elapsed time command during consecutive game result presentation. The number of jackpots during a series of games, the number of game balls acquired during a series of games, and the elapsed time of consecutive games immediately before the end of a series of games result presentation are displayed.

In the fifth embodiment, the performance time of the successive game result performance is set to 5 seconds. Therefore, when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the consecutive game result performance, the image CPU 141 erases the consecutive game result performance image G91 to end the consecutive game result performance, and displays the first normal background on the display unit 50a. The image G111 and the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a loss are displayed. Here, if it is a special loss variation, the image CPU 141 completely (definitely ) On the other hand, if it is a special revival jackpot variation, the display section 50a will show that it was actually a small win as shown in FIG. A revival performance is started to notify the player, and finally, at the timing when the special figure 2 stop display is performed, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are definitely stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY5, in addition to the performance flow composition performances such as special performances, consecutive game result performances, and revival performances, there are also jackpot games that are executed as jackpots with variable display of special symbols in the normal game state. It is possible to execute a time effect that continuously displays the time that has passed since the transition to the time-saving state (specific time-saving state) after (the first jackpot game), in other words, the time that has passed since the start of the consecutive games. .

The time effect can be executed during a series of games, and can be positioned as a production that displays the elapsed time of a series of games in real time. Note that this elapsed time of consecutive games corresponds to the "consecutive games elapsed time" that is measured by the aforementioned consecutive games elapsed time timer 128. However, as will be described later, during a consecutive game, the performance control microcomputer 121 may interrupt the measurement of the consecutive game elapsed time by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128. Therefore, the time displayed by the time effect may not accurately display the actual elapsed time of the consecutive games.

In the fifth embodiment, the time presentation starts at the timing of transition to the specific time saving state. Therefore, for example, when the ending of the first jackpot game ends, the performance control microcomputer 121 starts measuring the consecutive game elapsed time by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128, and also uses a command (timer) indicating the start of the time performance. A performance start command) is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. When the time effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the time effect from the image ROM 142. The image (time effect image) G90 is read out and displayed around the lower left corner of the display section 50a to start time effect. The time effect image G90 represents an eight-digit stop switch (00:00:00:00) that can count up seconds, minutes, and hours to the second decimal place. After starting the time effect, the image CPU 141 appropriately updates the time represented by the time effect image G90 as time passes.

Further, the time performance ends when the special symbol variable display related to the special loss variation ends and the normal game state is entered. Specifically, the time performance ends immediately before the consecutive winning result performance is performed in the special symbol variation performance based on the special loss variation. When the image CPU 141 receives the above-mentioned consecutive game elapsed time command during consecutive game result performance, it erases (hides) the time effect image G90 and then displays the consecutive game result performance image G91. In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the continuous game elapsed time command during the consecutive game result performance in the special figure variation performance based on the special loss variation, it resets the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 to change the consecutive game elapsed time. Finish the measurement.

Next, interruption of time presentation will be explained. Interruption of time presentation includes interruption of time presentation according to a first interruption mode, interruption of time presentation according to a second interruption mode, and interruption of time presentation according to a third interruption mode. The events that cause the interruption are different in the first interruption mode, the second interruption mode, and the third interruption mode, but as the effect mode related to the interruption, in the first interruption mode, the time effect image G90 is displayed. is a performance content in which the update of the consecutive elapsed time represented by the time performance image G90 is stopped, and the second interruption mode and the third interruption mode are performance contents in which the time performance image G90 is temporarily hidden. It is.

First, the interruption of the time presentation by the first interruption mode will be explained. The interruption of the time performance according to the first interruption mode is performed due to the jackpot special performance. The jackpot special performance is a performance that notifies you of a jackpot win, and is executed in the time performance image G90. Specifically, when the elapsed time of consecutive games is being updated in the time effect image G90, the time represented by the timer is changed to "00:00" as if the timer represented by the time effect image G90 has malfunctioned. :00:00”. In the fifth embodiment, the special jackpot effect starts when one second has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation effect related to the special normal jackpot variation.

In addition, the performance time of the jackpot special performance is set to 10 seconds. Therefore, the time effect interrupted by the first interruption mode is restarted when 10 seconds have elapsed since the interruption started. Then, the time presentation interrupted by the first interruption mode is restarted so that the interrupted time is corrected. That is, the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when the game is interrupted according to the first interruption mode is different from the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. Specifically, the value is the value obtained by subtracting the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the first interruption mode from the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarting. is the time during which it was interrupted.

When the performance control microcomputer 121 receives the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the special normal jackpot fluctuation, it performs a jackpot special performance execution determination to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot special performance. The jackpot special performance execution determination is executed using, for example, a jackpot special performance execution determination table stored in the performance ROM 123. It is assumed that the jackpot special effect execution determination table is configured such that it is determined that the jackpot special effect will be executed with a probability of 10%. Then, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines to execute the jackpot special performance in the jackpot special performance execution determination, it sends a command indicating the start of the jackpot special performance (jackpot special performance Start command) is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the special symbol fluctuation performance start command related to the special normal jackpot fluctuation set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 and the jackpot special performance start command are transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image control The image CPU 141 of the board 140 displays, on the display unit 50a, when one second has elapsed since the start of the special pattern variation effect related to the special normal jackpot variation, the consecutive game elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 is displayed as "00:00: 00:00'' and making it appear as if the timer represented by the time effect image G90 is out of order (bugged), thereby executing a special jackpot effect.

While the special jackpot performance is being executed, the performance control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the elapsed time of consecutive wins using the consecutive winnings elapsed time timer 128. Since the performance time of the jackpot special performance is set to 10 seconds, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the successive game elapsed time timer 128 to indicate when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the jackpot special performance. A command (first time performance restart command) indicating restart of the time performance including the elapsed time of consecutive games is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the first time performance restart command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the following information on the display unit 50a. The consecutive game elapsed time indicated by the time performance image G90 is changed to the consecutive game elapsed time indicated by the first time performance restart command, the display mode of the time performance image G90 is returned to the original normal mode, and the time performance is restarted.

Next, the interruption of the time presentation by the second interruption mode will be explained. The interruption of the time production in the second interruption mode is performed due to the stoppage of the game ball firing operation. In a period other than the period in which the round game is being played, when the game ball firing operation is stopped, specifically, when the handle 72k is not touched, the time effect image G90 is hidden. .

Further, the time performance interrupted by the second interruption mode is resumed when the situation is such that the game ball firing operation is deemed to have resumed, specifically when the handle 72k is touched again. Strictly speaking, the fact that the handle 72k is touched again does not necessarily constitute restarting the game ball firing operation, but in the fifth embodiment, it is considered as restarting the game ball firing operation. Then, the time performance interrupted by the second interruption mode is restarted at the elapsed time of consecutive games when it was interrupted. In other words, the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when the game is interrupted by the second interruption mode is the same as the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. .

The performance control microcomputer 121 operates during a period excluding the period from receiving the number of rounds designation command indicating the first round game to receiving the ending command of the jackpot game, in other words, excluding the period during which the round game is being executed. In the 1ms timer interrupt process in step S4011 during the period, whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF, that is, whether the handle 72k has changed from being touched to not being touched (game (whether the ball firing operation has stopped) and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON, that is, whether the handle 72k has changed from not being touched to being being touched. (Whether or not the game ball firing operation has been restarted).

When the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game ball firing operation has stopped, if the continuous game elapsed time timer 128 is measuring the consecutive game elapsed time, it interrupts the measurement. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 121 temporarily stops the consecutive games elapsed time timer 128 at the current consecutive games elapsed time. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 sends a command (second interruption mode interruption command) to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 to indicate that the time effect is interrupted in the second interruption mode (to hide the time effect image G90). set.

When the second interruption mode interruption command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the following information on the display unit 50a. The time effect image G90 is hidden.

In addition, when the performance control microcomputer 121 determines that the game ball firing operation has resumed, if the measurement of the consecutive game elapsed time by the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 has been temporarily stopped, the production control microcomputer 121 cancels the measurement, i.e. resume. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 121 restarts the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 from the current consecutive game elapsed time. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 indicates that the display of the time effect image G90 including the current elapsed time of consecutive games, that is, the elapsed time of consecutive games when the measurement of the consecutive games elapsed time timer 128 was temporarily stopped, is to be resumed. A command (second time performance restart command) is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the second time performance restart command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the following information on the display unit 50a. The display of the time effect image G90 is restarted at the elapsed consecutive game time indicated by the second time effect restart command, and the time effect on the time effect image G90 is restarted.

Next, the interruption of the time presentation by the third interruption mode will be explained. The interruption of the time performance according to the third interruption mode is performed due to the execution of the successive winning result performance related to the special revival jackpot fluctuation. In the special symbol variation performance related to the special revival jackpot variation, the time performance image G90 is hidden from immediately before the successive winning result performance is started until the revival performance is started.

Further, the time from the start of the successive game result performance to the start of the revival performance is set to 7 seconds (5 seconds of the successive game result performance + 2 seconds of temporary stop display of performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3). Therefore, the time effect interrupted by the third interruption mode is restarted when 7 seconds have elapsed since the interruption started. Then, the time presentation interrupted by the third interruption mode is restarted so that the interrupted time is corrected. That is, the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when the game is interrupted according to the third interruption mode is different from the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarted. Specifically, the value is the value obtained by subtracting the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when interrupted by the third interruption mode from the elapsed time of consecutive games represented by the time effect (time effect image G90) when restarting. is the time during which it was interrupted.

Also, in the special symbol variation effect related to the special revival jackpot variation, the time effect image G90 is erased (hidden) immediately before the consecutive winning result effect is started, as in the case of the special loss variation. However, in the case of a special loss variation, the time effect image G90 is deleted and the time effect ends as it is, whereas in the case of a special revival jackpot variation, the time effect image G90 is erased and the time effect image G90 is erased. G90 is displayed and the time presentation restarts. In other words, in the case of the special revival jackpot fluctuation, the time presentation has been interrupted in a non-display manner.

As mentioned above, the production control microcomputer 121, when 10 seconds (7 seconds until the winning/losing point + 3 seconds of the loss suggesting production) have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation production related to the special revival jackpot variation, A consecutive game elapsed time command is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 at the time of consecutive game result performance. However, when the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the continuous game elapsed time command during the consecutive game result performance in the special symbol fluctuation performance based on the special revival jackpot fluctuation, the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is not reset, and the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 is not reset. Continue measuring elapsed time.

When the consecutive game elapsed time command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the In section 50a, time effect image G90 is hidden.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive game elapsed time using the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 while the special symbol fluctuation performance related to the special revival jackpot fluctuation is being executed. 17 seconds from the start of the special symbol fluctuation effect (7 seconds until the winning/losing point + 3 seconds of the loss suggestion effect + 5 seconds of the consecutive winning result effect + 2 seconds of the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3) When the elapsed time has elapsed, a command (third time effect restart command) indicating to restart the display of the time effect image G90 including the elapsed time of consecutive games indicated by the consecutive consecutive games elapsed time timer 128 at that time is sent to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to .

When the third time performance restart command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 displays the following information on the display unit 50a. The display of the time effect image G90 is restarted at the elapsed consecutive game time indicated by the third time effect restart command, and the time effect on the time effect image G90 is restarted.

Next, a specific example of time presentation will be explained using FIGS. 102 to 109. In this specific example, it is assumed that the game is played as follows. The specific example starts from the ending of the first jackpot game. Then, in response to the end of the first jackpot game, the time saving state is entered. In other words, a series of consecutive games begins. In this time-saving state, a special symbol variation effect related to a special normal jackpot variation is executed. In this special figure variation performance, the time performance is not interrupted and the time performance is performed normally. Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special normal jackpot variation ends, a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won, and a third jackpot game is executed. In response to the end of the third jackpot game, a time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, the special symbol variation performance related to the special normal jackpot variation is executed again. In this special figure variation performance, the time performance is interrupted by the jackpot special performance (the time performance is interrupted in the first interruption mode). Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special normal jackpot variation ends, a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won, and a third jackpot game is executed. In response to the end of the third jackpot game, a time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, a special symbol variation effect related to a special revival jackpot variation is executed. During this special figure variation performance, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure variation production, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, and 3 seconds have passed since then. When this happens, the output (contact detection signal) from the touch switch 72a changes from OFF to ON. That is, the game ball firing operation is stopped for 3 seconds after 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special figure variation effect. As a result, while the game ball firing operation is stopped, the time presentation is interrupted by non-display (the time presentation is interrupted in the second interruption mode). In addition, since it is a special revival jackpot fluctuation, the time effect is interrupted by non-display from the start of the successive result effect until the start of the resurrection effect (the time effect is interrupted in the third interruption mode) . Then, the special figure 2 variable display related to the special revival jackpot fluctuation is finished, the small winning game is executed, a V prize is won, and the third jackpot game is executed. In response to the end of the third jackpot game, a time-saving state is entered, and in the time-saving state, a special symbol variation effect related to a special loss variation is executed. When the special figure 2 variable display related to the special loss fluctuation is executed, the normal game state is entered and the consecutive winnings are ended. In addition, in this special figure variation performance, the time performance ends when the consecutive game result performance is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(A), when the ending of the first jackpot game is being played, when the ending ends, the state shifts to the time saving state. As shown in , the display section 50a displays a background image for a special effect, and performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot related to the first jackpot game. Then, at the timing when the first jackpot game executed based on the special figure variable display in the normal game state ends and shifts to the time saving state, in other words, at the timing when the consecutive games start, the time effect image G90 is displayed on the display section. 50a and the time presentation starts. Immediately after the time effect image G90 is displayed, updating of the elapsed consecutive game time displayed on the time effect image G90 starts.

For example, as shown in FIG. 102(C), it is assumed that when 4 seconds have elapsed since the time saving state was entered, a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and the special drawing 2 variable display is started. In addition, as explained in the above-mentioned specific example here, the special figure 2 variation pattern related to the first special figure 2 variable display in this series of games is a special normal jackpot variation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 102(C) to 102(E), on the display section 50a, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner that the special performance progresses and finally indicates a jackpot. Since it is assumed that the time effect is performed normally in this special figure 2 variable display, the consecutive game elapsed time displayed on the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate in accordance with the passage of time.

Next, a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third jackpot game is executed, but on the display section 50a, effects corresponding to the small winning game and the third jackpot game are displayed as appropriate. will be expanded to. During this time, as shown in FIGS. 103(A) to 103(D), the elapsed consecutive games time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate as time passes.

When the 3rd jackpot game ends, it shifts to the time-saving state, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special figure 2 variable pattern related to the second special figure 2 variable display in this consecutive game is a special normal jackpot. It is a fluctuation. However, in the specific example here, a jackpot special effect is to be executed in the special symbol variation effect related to the special normal jackpot variation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 104(A) to FIG. 104(B), the special figure variable effect related to the second special figure 2 variable display in the series is started, and the time effect image G90 changes as time passes. The jackpot special performance starts when one second has elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation performance while the successive game elapsed time displayed on the screen continues to be updated as appropriate. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104(C), the elapsed consecutive home time displayed in the time effect image G90 becomes "00:00:00:00" and the update stops, and the time effect image G90 The display mode changes from the normal mode to a special mode in which the timer representing the time effect image G90 is out of order.

Since the performance time of the jackpot special performance is 10 seconds, the jackpot special performance ends when 10 seconds have passed from the start of the jackpot special performance, and the time performance starts. resume. Specifically, the display mode of the time effect image G90 returns to the normal mode, and the consecutive game elapsed time is updated. Here, while the updating of the consecutive game elapsed time in the time effect image G90 due to the special jackpot effect is stopped, the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 continues to measure the consecutive game elapsed time. Therefore, when the time effect is restarted, the elapsed consecutive game time represented by the time effect image G90 is corrected (corrected) to the actual (regular) consecutive game elapsed time, and then the update is restarted. In other words, the time during which the update was stopped is added to the consecutive game elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90.

It should be noted that while the updating of the consecutive game elapsed time in the time effect image G90 due to the jackpot special effect is stopped, the special effect continues on the display section 50a in the same way as when the stop is not performed. Then, after the time effect is resumed, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F), on the display section 50a, the special effect progresses and finally the effect patterns EZ1 to 100 indicating the jackpot are shown. The stop display of EZ3 is performed, but during this time, the consecutive game elapsed time displayed on the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate in accordance with the passage of time.

After the situation shown in FIG. 104(F), a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third jackpot game is executed, but on the display section 50a, the small winning game and the third Performances will be developed according to the three jackpot games. During this time, as shown in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G), the elapsed consecutive games time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate as time passes. In fact, suppose that there is a time period during this round game in which the player takes his hand off the handle 72k and the game ball firing operation is stopped. However, as mentioned above, the output state from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, and the time presentation is interrupted. Specifically, the time presentation image G90 is hidden, and the consecutive shot elapsed time timer of the presentation control microcomputer 121 is interrupted. Since the measurement of consecutive game elapsed time by 128 is interrupted during a period other than the period in which a round game is being played, here, as shown in FIGS. Even during the period when the output state from the switch 72a changes from ON to OFF and the firing of game balls is not stopped, the consecutive game elapsed time displayed on the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate according to the passage of time. .

When the second third jackpot game in a series of games ends, the time-saving state is entered, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special figure 2 related to the third special figure 2 variable display in this series of games changes to the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is assumed to be a special revival jackpot fluctuation. Furthermore, in the specific example here, the output from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special symbol variation performance related to the special normal jackpot variation, and 3 seconds have passed since then. It is assumed that when this happens, the output from the touch switch 72a changes from OFF to ON. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 106(A) and 106(B), the special figure variable effect related to the third variable display of the special figure 2 in the series is started, and the time effect image G90 changes as time passes. While the elapsed time displayed in the series continues to be updated as appropriate, when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure variation effect, the time effect image is displayed as shown in FIG. 106(C). G90 is hidden and the time presentation is interrupted. Note that while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the measurement of the elapsed time for consecutive hits by the consecutive winnings elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 is interrupted.

Then, when three seconds have elapsed since the output from the touch switch 72a turned OFF, the output from the touch switch 72a changes from OFF to ON, so that the time effect image G90 changes as shown in FIG. 106(D). will be displayed and the time display will resume. However, here, since the measurement of consecutive consecutive games elapsed time by the consecutive consecutive games elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 was also interrupted, when the time presentation is resumed, the consecutive consecutive games elapsed time represented by the time presentation image G90 is On the other hand, the process is restarted at the elapsed consecutive game time when the time effect image G90 was hidden.

After the time effect resumes, the special effect progresses on the display section 50a as shown in FIGS. 106(E) to 107(A), but during this time, the time effect image G90 The elapsed time displayed will continue to be updated as appropriate. However, since the special symbol variation effect related to the special revival jackpot variation is being executed, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the special symbol variation effect, the time effect image G90 becomes non-existent, as shown in FIG. 107(B). At the same time, the time effect is interrupted, and the consecutive game result effect image G91 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a, and the consecutive game result effect is executed.

Then, in the special pattern variation performance related to the special revival jackpot variation, when the successive winning result production ends, the first normal background image G111 is displayed as in the case of the special loss variation, as shown in FIG. 107(C). At the same time, the temporarily stopped performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a manner indicating a loss. At this time as well, the time effect image G90 is hidden and the time effect is interrupted.

When two seconds have elapsed since the end of the successive winning result performance, a revival performance is performed to notify that the player actually won a small hit (substantially, a big win), as shown in FIG. 107(D). Then, when this revival performance starts, the time performance restarts. Specifically, the time effect image G90 is displayed, and the elapsed consecutive game time in the time effect image G90 is updated. It should be noted that while the time effect image G90 due to consecutive game result effects etc. is not displayed, the consecutive game elapsed time timer 128 of the microcomputer 121 for controlling the performance continues to measure the consecutive game elapsed time, so the time effect is not displayed. When restarting, the update is restarted after the consecutive game elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 is corrected (corrected) to the actual (regular) consecutive game elapsed time. In other words, the time during which the update was not displayed is added to the consecutive game elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90.

Then, after the time effect is restarted, as shown in FIGS. 107(D) to 107(E), on the display section 50a, the revival effect progresses and the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ1 to finally indicate a jackpot are displayed on the display section 50a. The stop display of EZ3 is performed, but during this time, the consecutive game elapsed time displayed on the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate in accordance with the passage of time.

After the situation shown in FIG. 107(E), a small winning game is executed, a V prize is won in the small winning game, and a third jackpot game is executed, but on the display section 50a, the small winning game and the third Performances will be developed according to the three jackpot games. During this time, as shown in FIGS. 108(A) to 108(D), the consecutive game elapsed time displayed in the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate as time passes.

When the 3rd jackpot game in the 3rd consecutive game ends, the time-saving state is entered, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed in the time-saving state, but the special figure 2 related to the 4th special figure 2 variable display in this consecutive game is changed to the time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is assumed to be a special loss fluctuation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 109(A) to FIG. 109(B), from the start of the special figure variation effect related to the fourth special figure 2 variable display in a series of games until the execution of the series of house result effects. , the consecutive game elapsed time displayed on the time effect image G90 continues to be updated as appropriate as time passes. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the special figure variation effect, the time effect image G90 is hidden, the time effect ends, and the time effect image G90 is displayed in the center of the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 109(C). A consecutive game result performance image G91 is displayed and a consecutive game result performance is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109(D), the first normal background image G111 is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss are displayed. ), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed as they are, and the game enters the normal gaming state and the consecutive winnings end. Then, in response to the end of the consecutive games, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a left-handed hitting image G93 that notifies the left-handed hitting according to the normal gaming state is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means) that executes the performance measures the elapsed time of consecutive games (a specific gaming state advantageous to the player). If a specific condition is met during the execution of a time performance, the measurement of the elapsed time for consecutive games may be interrupted, which improves the accuracy of measuring the elapsed time for consecutive games. The presentation effect is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, since the specific conditions for interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive hits include the failure to launch the game ball, the elapsed time of consecutive hits reflects the player's playing time more accurately. Therefore, the performance effect of the time performance is further enhanced and the game enjoyment is improved. Furthermore, if a specific condition is met during the execution of the time performance in the jackpot game state (a special game state in which game balls enter the jackpot slots 14 and 15 easily), the measurement of the elapsed game time will not be interrupted. Since the consecutive game elapsed time more accurately reflects the player's playing time, the effect of the time presentation is further enhanced and the interest in the game is improved.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means for executing the performance) measures the elapsed time of consecutive games (a specific gaming state advantageous to the player), and Depending on the time, it is possible to execute a time effect that updates the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (a predetermined numerical image) and displays it on the display unit 50a, and it is possible to interrupt the updating of the numerical value of the numerical image while the time effect is being executed. Therefore, since the player can pay attention to the time effect image G90, the effect of the time effect is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, as an interruption of updating the numerical value of the time rendering image G90 (predetermined numerical image) in the time rendering, the updating of the numerical value of the time rendering image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is stopped, and the updating of the numerical value of the time rendering image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is stopped. ), the effect of the time presentation is further enhanced and the game becomes more interesting. Furthermore, if a jackpot special effect is executed during the execution of the time effect (if the first condition is met), updating of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is stopped, and the game ball When the firing operation is stopped or when the successive shot result effect is executed (when the second condition is met), the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is hidden, so the numerical value Since the interruption of updating the numerical values of the image is sharp, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect of the time presentation.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means for executing the performance) measures the elapsed time of consecutive games (a specific gaming state advantageous to the player), and It is possible to execute a time effect that updates the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (a predetermined numerical image) and displays it on the display unit 50a according to the elapsed time, and during the execution of the time effect, the elapsed time between consecutive homes can be measured. Since the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) may be interrupted without interrupting the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical value image), it is possible to give a surprise to the player when the time effect resumes. The effect is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 (production execution means for executing the production) updates the numerical value of the time production image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without interrupting the measurement of elapsed time during the execution of the time production. The update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is interrupted because there are times when the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive games is interrupted and the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is interrupted. Since the difference is sharpened, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect of the time production. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 121 (performance execution means for executing the performance) controls the elapsed consecutive game time when a jackpot special performance is executed (when the first condition is satisfied) during the execution of the time performance. While updating the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) without interrupting the measurement, if the firing operation of the game ball is stopped (if the second condition is satisfied), the consecutive game progress is Since the measurement of time is interrupted and the update of the numerical value of the time effect image G90 (predetermined numerical image) is also interrupted, the elapsed time more accurately reflects the player's playing time. The performance effect of time performance is enhanced and the interest in the game is improved.

(Example of modification of fifth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that it is also possible to appropriately combine the modification examples described below.

The start of updating the consecutive game elapsed time in the time performance is when the transition to the time saving state occurs, but the start timing is not particularly limited, and for example, at the start of a jackpot game before the time saving state, or at the time of the time saving state. It may be changed as appropriate, such as at the start of the special figure 2 variable display.

Although the time performance is interrupted by the jackpot special performance, it may be possible to interrupt the time performance with the same performance content even in the special symbol variation performance related to a loss. In other words, the elapsed consecutive game time in the time effect image G90 is updated as a production that suggests that there is a possibility of entering the jackpot gaming state, in other words, as a production that increases the chance of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state. may be stopped. In this case, it may be arranged such that the longer the stop time becomes, the higher the possibility of a jackpot game state becomes.

Alternatively, from the perspective of so-called "ball payout performance" and the gaming state that changes after the end of a jackpot game, there are jackpot games that are relatively advantageous to the player and jackpot games that are relatively disadvantageous to the player. In an advantageous jackpot game, the player may be informed that the game is an advantageous jackpot game by interrupting the time performance such as a jackpot special performance at a predetermined probability. Alternatively, in both a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player and a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player, the time performance may be interrupted, such as a special jackpot performance, but the execution of the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player may be interrupted. It may be arranged to increase the chances of what is being executed.

Moreover, as the stop of updating of the elapsed time of consecutive games in the time effect image G90 related to the special jackpot performance, the updating may be stopped at the elapsed time of consecutive games when the special jackpot performance starts. Alternatively, as a special jackpot effect, the time effect image G90 may be hidden.

Furthermore, when a time performance that was interrupted by a special jackpot performance is restarted, it will be restarted at the elapsed time of successive games at the start of the interruption, as in the case where the game ball launch is stopped (the output from the touch switch 72a is turned from ON to OFF). You may also do so. That is, while the special jackpot performance is being executed, the measurement of the elapsed time of consecutive wins by the consecutive winnings elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 may be interrupted.

As the time effect is interrupted when the output from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF, the time effect image G90 is hidden, but as an interruption mode in this case, the time effect image G90 is displayed. , the effect content may be such that the consecutive game elapsed time represented by the time effect image G90 is stopped as it was when it turned from ON to OFF. In this case, the time presentation may be restarted by restarting the update from the stopped consecutive game elapsed time when the output from the touch switch 72a is turned from OFF to ON.

Furthermore, when the interrupted time performance is restarted due to the output from the touch switch 72a being turned from ON to OFF, the suspended time is added to the restart as in the case of the jackpot special performance. It's okay. That is, while the output from the touch switch 72a is OFF, the continuous play elapsed time timer 128 of the production control microcomputer 121 may continue to measure the continuous play elapsed time.

The time effect image G90 is hidden as an interruption of the time effect when the consecutive game result effect is executed, but as an interruption mode in this case, the time effect image G90 is displayed, but the time effect image G90 The performance content may be such that the consecutive game elapsed time represented by is stopped at the start of the consecutive game result performance. In this case, even when the time effect ends in the special loss variation, the time effect image G90 may be displayed in the same way while the consecutive winning result effect is being executed. Then, for example, when the special figure 2 stop display indicating a loss is performed, the time effect image G90 may be erased and the time effect may be ended. Alternatively, in the case of a special loss variation, the time performance may end at the timing when the successive game result performance ends, and in the case of a special revival jackpot variation, the time performance may continue even if the successive success result performance ends. In addition, when the time effect image G90 is displayed while the consecutive games result effect is being executed, the display content of the consecutive games result effect may not include the elapsed consecutive games time.

In addition, the time performance that was interrupted by the successive game result performance will be resumed when the revival performance starts, but the restart timing is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as the timing when the successive game result performance ends, etc. May be changed.

Furthermore, when the time performance that was interrupted due to the consecutive game result performance is restarted, the elapsed consecutive game time at the start of the interruption is the same as when the game ball launch is stopped (the output from the touch switch 72a changes from ON to OFF). It may be restarted. That is, while the consecutive winning result performance is being executed, the measurement of the consecutive winning elapsed time by the consecutive winning elapsed time timer 128 of the performance control microcomputer 121 may be interrupted.

Although it is assumed that the output from the touch switch 72a is turned OFF to stop the game ball firing, the method of detecting the stoppage of the game ball firing is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. . For example, when the output of the firing volume knob 72b becomes "0", the firing of game balls may be stopped, and the time presentation may be interrupted. Alternatively, a sensor capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the firing area 7, and when the sensor does not detect a game ball for a predetermined period of time, the firing of the game ball may be stopped, and the time performance may be interrupted.

It is determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON during a period other than the period in which the round game is being played. However, this period is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, whether or not the output from the touch switch 72a changed from ON to OFF, and whether the output from the touch switch 72a changed from OFF to ON during a period other than the entire jackpot game including the opening, round game, and ending. , may be determined. Alternatively, it is determined whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from ON to OFF and whether the output from the touch switch 72a has changed from OFF to ON in a period other than the small winning game and the jackpot game. You can do it like this.

Although the performance control board 120 measures the elapsed time of consecutive games, the image control board 140 may measure the elapsed time of consecutive games.

Type of special figure 2 variation pattern in time saving state, time related to special figure 2 variation pattern in time saving state, small winning probability, upper limit of special figure 2 pending number, type of jackpot, jackpot game component, end of jackpot game The type of gaming state to be transitioned to depending on is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

The consecutive winnings end when the special drawing 2 variable display related to the loss is executed in the time saving state and the game immediately shifts to the normal gaming state, but the trigger for ending the consecutive winnings may be changed as appropriate. For example, after a jackpot game based on a jackpot in the second jackpot determination, there are times when it shifts to a time-saving state and times when it shifts to a normal gaming state. You can also do it. In this case, in a round game, it is possible to perform a special effect that incites whether the consecutive games will continue or end, and for example, in the last round game, when moving to a time-saving state, the consecutive games will continue. It is also possible to perform a performance suggesting that the game will end, while a performance suggesting that the consecutive games will end when transitioning to the normal gaming state is executed, and a consecutive games result performance may be executed at the ending. However, even in such a case, when transitioning to the time saving state, in the last round game, a performance indicating that the consecutive games will end is executed, and a consecutive games result performance is executed at the ending, Eventually, a revival effect may be executed.

7. Other modification examples Next, other modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machines PY1 according to the first embodiment to pachinko gaming machines PY5 according to the fifth embodiment are described below. explain. Hereinafter, the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machines PY1 according to the first embodiment to the pachinko gaming machines PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machines PY, etc.".

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY, the display unit 50a is used to variably display the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the results of the special drawing lottery. (Slot machine)" A drum with a symbol displayed thereon may be provided, and the drum may be variably displayed to notify the result of the special drawing lottery.

Further, in the pachinko game machine PY, the big prize opening 14 can be opened in a jackpot game, but a winning area other than the big prize opening 14 that can be opened in a jackpot game may be provided.

Furthermore, in pachinko gaming machines such as PY, when a particular jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which a game ball can enter when opened is provided at a position in the gaming area 6 that can be reached by the game ball. In a predetermined round game, when the second big winning device is opened and the game ball that enters the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side, a high probability state occurs as the jackpot game ends. may be set.

In this case, for example, the second jackpot device releases a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) for a time when it is easy to enter the ball (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second jackpot device A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set a high probability state) that is released for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game ball can pass through the second grand prize winning device, and a sorting device is provided for distributing the game ball into the specific area and the non-specific area. Although the opening time of the second grand prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second grand prize device and the operating mode of the sorting device creates a jackpot pattern and a high probability state that make it easy to set a high probability state. It is also possible to provide jackpot symbols that are difficult to set.

In addition, in a pachinko game machine PY, etc., the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (control of the game). 120, game control and performance control are performed by different boards, but they may be configured to be performed by a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to other pinball gaming machines such as arranged ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines, as well as reel-type gaming machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to G have been disclosed up to the previous paragraph of this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the descriptions of Inventions A to G, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the inventions described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for inventions A1 to A3 below, invention B is a generic term for inventions B1 to B3 below, invention C is a generic term for inventions C1 to C3 below, and invention D is a generic term for inventions A1 to A3 below. , Invention E is a generic term for the following inventions D1 to D3, Invention E is a generic term for the following inventions E1 to E3, Invention F is a generic term for the following inventions F1 to F3, and Invention G is the following invention G1. ~It is a general term for G3.

Furthermore, according to the invention A, the effect of improving the interest in the game is achieved with respect to the problem 1 described below regarding the game machine described in JP-A No. 2022-059249. In the game machine described in JP-A-2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Then, a specific performance that suggests that an advantageous gaming state may occur may be executed, and furthermore, before the specific performance is executed, a precursor performance that suggests that the specific performance will be executed is executed. Sometimes. However, the aim is to improve gaming enjoyment for gaming machines that are capable of executing a precursor performance that suggests that a specific performance will be executed before a specific performance that suggests that there is a possibility of an advantageous gaming state being executed. Therefore, there is still room for improvement. Therefore, the first objective is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Further, according to Invention B, Invention E, Invention F, and Invention G, there is an effect of improving gaming interest with respect to Problem 2 described below regarding the gaming machine described in JP-A-2022-059249. In the game machine described in JP-A-2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Then, a specific image may be displayed on the display unit. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of displaying specific images on the display section in order to increase the interest in gaming. Therefore, the second problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to invention C, there is an effect of improving the interest in playing the game machine described in JP-A No. 2019-181255 with respect to problem 3 described below. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-181255, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Then, a specific performance indicating that there is a possibility of an advantageous gaming state may be executed, and in the specific performance, a plurality of unit performances are continuously executed. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing a specific performance in which a plurality of unit performances are consecutively executed in order to improve the game's interest. Therefore, the third problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to invention D, the game machine described in JP-A No. 2022-059249 has the effect of improving game interest in solving problem 4 described below. In the game machine described in JP-A-2022-059249, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball entering a starting hole is satisfied, a variable display of special symbols is executed. After the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Here, when a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game may be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. Various performances are executed during the game, and specifications regarding specific matters regarding the performances can be changed. However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines whose specifications can be changed with respect to specific matters related to performance, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the fourth problem is to provide a new gaming machine that improves gaming enjoyment.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to invention A1 is
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can create an advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state, high probability state, time saving state) advantageous to the player;
A production execution means (production control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing production,
The performance execution means is
A specific performance (director performance) may be executed that suggests that there is a possibility of the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state,
Before executing the specific performance, a precursor performance (precursor performance) suggesting that the specific performance will be executed may be performed,
If the specific performance is not executed after the precursor performance is executed, the possibility that the advantageous gaming state will be reached is higher than the possibility that the advantageous gaming state will not be reached.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific performance includes a first specific performance (first specific performance) and a second specific performance (second specific performance) whose performance mode is different from the first specific performance.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to invention A2,
The foreshadowing performance may suggest that the first specific performance will be performed, or may suggest that the second specific performance will be performed, and in both cases, the performance mode is approximately the same. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to invention B1 is
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can create an advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state, high probability state, time saving state) advantageous to the player;
A production execution means (production control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing production,
The performance execution means is
In the display unit, when displaying a specific image (a pending icon, the icon) at a first display position (first special position), and when displaying the specific image at a second display position (second special position); There is,
A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to occur when the specific image is displayed at the second display position than when the specific image is displayed at the first display position. .

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
As the display position of the specific image, there is a normal normal display position (normal position),
When the specific image is displayed at the normal display position and moves to the first display position; and when the specific image is displayed at the normal display position and moves to the second display position. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
The game execution means is capable of determining whether or not to enter the advantageous gaming state (jackpot determination), and may enter the advantageous gaming state when it is determined to enter the advantageous gaming state in the judgment,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific image is an image that may be displayed in the normal display position in response to generation of the right to execute the determination (special figure 1 pending).

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to invention C1 is
A game execution means (game control board 100) that can create an advantageous gaming state (jackpot gaming state, high probability state, time saving state) advantageous to the player;
A production execution means (production control board 120, image control board 140) capable of executing production,
The performance execution means is
A specific performance (special mode performance) may be executed that suggests that there is a possibility of the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state,
In the specific performance, multiple types of unit performances (cut-in performance, cross-group performance, frame lamp flash) can be executed continuously N times (3 times), and the same type of unit performance can be performed N-1 times. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is more likely to occur when the game is played N times than when it is played N times.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit performances include a first unit performance (cut-in performance) and a second unit performance (group crossing performance),
Compared to the case where both the first unit performance and the second unit performance are executed together in the specific performance, only one of the first unit performance or the second unit performance is executed alone in the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state being reached is higher when the gaming machine is executed.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The unit performance includes a first unit performance (cut-in performance) and a second unit performance,
The advantageous gaming state is more likely to occur when the second unit performance (group crossing performance) is executed N times in the specific performance than when the first unit performance is executed N times in the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized by high performance.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to invention D1 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (performance control board 120) capable of executing a performance,
Specifications of specific matters related to production (first production specific matters to fifth production specific matters) include a default first specification (default state) and a second specification (customized state) that is different from the first specification.
When the second specification is set as the specification of the specific item, the effect execution means can execute a specific display (in-gaming custom operation image G80) on the display unit inquiring about continuation of the setting of the second specification. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
When a predetermined condition (winning in the first starting port 11, second starting port 12) is met, it is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbol), and a specific result (jackpot symbol) can be displayed with the variable display of the identification information. It further comprises a game execution means (game control board 100) that may execute a specific game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when derived,
The performance execution means variably displays the identification information, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the variably displays the identification information in a non-gaming state (customer waiting state) where the specific game is not being performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific display may be executed.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
It further includes operation means (cross button 40k, first effect button 41k) that can be operated by the player,
In the non-gaming state, the specification of the specific item can be changed from the first specification to the second specification by operating the operating means,
If the specification of the specific item is changed from the first specification to the second specification in the non-gaming state, in the variable display of the identification information executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-gaming state, A game characterized in that the display is not executed, but the specific display may be executed in the variable display of the identification information that is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-gaming state that occurs next. Machine.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of setting a specific game state (successive game) advantageous to the player;
A performance execution means (performance control board 120, image control board 140) that executes a performance using a performance means including a predetermined display means (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a time performance (time performance) that measures the elapsed time of the specific gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that if a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the time effect, measurement of the elapsed time may be interrupted.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
Further comprising an operation means (handle 72k) that allows the player to perform a shooting operation of the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific condition is that the firing operation is not performed.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to invention E2,
It further includes winning holes (first big winning hole 14, second big winning hole 15) into which game balls can enter,
The specific gaming state includes a special gaming state (jackpot gaming state) in which a game ball easily enters the winning slot,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means may not interrupt the measurement of the elapsed time if the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the time performance in the special game state.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of setting a specific game state (successive game) advantageous to the player;
A production execution means (production control board 120, image control board 140) that executes production using production means including a predetermined display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to measure the elapsed time of the specific gaming state and execute a time effect (time effect) in which the numerical value of a predetermined numerical value image (time effect image G90) is updated and displayed on the display means according to the elapsed time. and
A gaming machine characterized in that updating of the numerical value of the numerical image may be interrupted during execution of the time effect.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to invention F1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means has a time during which the time effect is executed, and sometimes stops updating the numerical value of the numerical image, and sometimes hides the numerical image.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to invention F2,
If a first condition (execution of a jackpot special effect) is satisfied during the execution of the time effect, the effect execution means stops updating the numerical value of the numerical image, while updating the second condition (the number of game balls). A game machine characterized in that the numerical image is hidden when a stoppage of firing or execution of a consecutive game result performance is established.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to invention G1 is
A game control means (game control board 100) capable of setting a specific game state (successive game) advantageous to the player;
A production execution means (production control board 120, image control board 140) that executes production using production means including a predetermined display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to measure the elapsed time of the specific gaming state and execute a time effect (time effect) in which the numerical value of a predetermined numerical value image (time effect image G90) is updated and displayed on the display means according to the elapsed time. and
A gaming machine characterized in that during execution of the time effect, updating of the numerical value of the numerical image may be interrupted without interrupting measurement of the elapsed time.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to invention G1,
During execution of the time performance, the effect execution means may interrupt updating of the numerical value of the numerical image without interrupting measurement of the elapsed time, and update the numerical value of the numerical image while interrupting measurement of the elapsed time. A gaming machine characterized in that updating of numerical values is sometimes interrupted.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to invention G2,
If a first condition (execution of a jackpot special effect, execution of a successive winning result effect) is satisfied during execution of the time effect, the effect execution means calculates the numerical value without interrupting the measurement of the elapsed time. While the update of the numerical value of the image is interrupted, if a second condition (stopping of firing of game balls) is satisfied, the measurement of the elapsed time is interrupted and the updating of the numerical value of the numerical image is also interrupted. A gaming machine.

PY, PY1, PY2, PY3, PY4, PY5...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 6...Game area 6A...Left gaming area 6B...Right gaming area 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second Starting port 12a...Second starting port sensor 14...Big winning port 14a...Big winning port sensor 40...Cross button device 40k...Cross button 40ku...Upper operating section 40kd...Lower operating section 40kl...Left operating section 40kr...Right operating section 41 ...First production button device 41k...First production button 50...Image display device 50a...Display section 52...Speaker 53...Frame lamp 72k...Handle 72a...Touch switch 100...Game control board 101...Microcomputer for game control 120...Production control Board 128... Production specific item storage unit, successive shot elapsed time timer 121... Production control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (1)

A game execution means that may create an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
and a performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
A specific performance may be executed that suggests that there is a possibility of the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state,
In the specific performance, multiple types of unit performances can be performed N times in succession, and the case where the same type of unit performance is performed N times is better than the case where the unit performance of the same type is performed N-1 times. There is a high possibility that you will be in an advantageous gaming situation,
The unit performance includes a first unit performance and a second unit performance,
Compared to the case where both the first unit performance and the second unit performance are executed together in the specific performance, only one of the first unit performance or the second unit performance is executed alone in the specific performance. If the game is executed in
The performance mode of the first unit performance includes a first low expectation mode, and a first medium expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the first low expectation mode. a first high expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the first medium expectation mode;
The presentation mode of the second unit performance includes a second low expectation mode, and a second medium expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the second low expectation mode. a second high expectation mode that suggests that the possibility of the advantageous gaming state is higher than the second medium expectation mode;
If the unit performance of the same type is performed two or more times in one specific performance, it will not be performed in the same performance mode, but in the specific performance, the second or more production mode in a certain order. The gaming machine is characterized in that the above is executed in such a way that the expectation level of the advantageous gaming state is higher than that of the previous turn .

Images